Container Refrigeration

OPERATIONS AND SERVICE

MANUAL
For

69NT40-561-001 to 199
Container Refrigeration Units

T-340 Rev F
OPERATIONS AND SERVICE
MANUAL
For

69NT40-561-001 to 199

© 2020 Carrier Corporation ● Printed in USA August 2020

 TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH NUMBER PAGE

SAFETY SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1.1 GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.2 FIRST AID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.3 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.4 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.5 SPECIFIC HAZARD STATEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.2 CONFIGURATION IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3 FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.1 Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.2 Temperature Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.3 Pressure Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.4 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.5 Condenser Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.6 Evaporator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.7 Evaporator Fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.8 Plate Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.4 OPTION DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.2 Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.3 USDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.4 Interrogator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.5 Remote Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.6 Quest - CCPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.7 Communications Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.8 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.9 Temperature Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.10 Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.11 Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.12 Thermometer Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.13 Water Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.14 Back Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.15 460 Volt Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.16 230 Volt Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.17 Cable Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.18 Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.19 Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.20 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.21 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.22 Condenser Grille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.23 Emergency Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.24 eAutoFresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3

i T-340
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.2 Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.1.3 Evaporator Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.1.4 Compressor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.1.5 Air-Cooled Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3.1.6 Water-Cooled Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.1.7 Control Box Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.1.8 Communications Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.2 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3.3 ELECTRICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3.4 SAFETY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3.5 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.5.1 Standard Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.5.2 Economized Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.5.3 Electronic Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
MICROPROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1 TEMPERATURE CONTROL MICROPROCESSOR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1.1 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.1.2 Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.1.3 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.2 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.2.1 Configuration Software (CnF Variables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.2.2 Operational Software (Cd Function Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.3 MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.3.1 Start up - Compressor Phase Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.2 Start up - Compressor Bump Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.3 Perishable Mode Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.4 Perishable Pulldown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.5 Perishable Steady State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.6 Perishable Idle, Air Circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.7 Perishable Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.8 Perishable Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.3.9 Perishable Dehumidification - Bulb Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.3.10 Perishable Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.3.11 Perishable Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.3.12 Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4.3.13 Perishable Mode - Trim Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.14 Frozen Mode - Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.15 Frozen Steady State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.16 Frozen Idle Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.17 Frozen “Heat” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.3.18 Frozen Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.3.19 Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.3.20 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4.3.21 Automatic Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.3.22 Defrost Initiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12

T-340 ii
 4.3.23 Defrost Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.3.24 Defrost Related Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.4 PROTECTION MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.4.1 Evaporator Fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.4.2 Failure Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.4.3 Generator Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.4.4 Compressor High Temperature, Low Pressure Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.4.5 Perishable Mode - System Pressure Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.4.6 Condenser Fan Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.5 QUEST - CCPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.6 CONTROLLER ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.7 PRE-TRIP DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
4.8 DATACORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
4.8.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
4.8.2 DataCORDER Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
4.8.3 Sensor Configuration (dCF02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4.8.4 Logging Interval (dCF03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4.8.5 Thermistor Format (dCF04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4.8.6 Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
4.8.7 Alarm Configuration (dCF07 - dCF10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
4.8.8 DataCORDER Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
4.8.9 Pre-trip Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
4.8.10 DataCORDER Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
4.8.11 USDA Cold Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
4.8.12 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
4.8.13 DataCORDER Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–23
4.8.14 ISO Trip Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–24
4.9 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–24
4.10 CONTROLLER FUNCTION CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
4.11 CONTROLLER ALARM INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–37
4.12 CONTROLLER PRE-TRIP TEST CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–46
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.1 INSPECTION (BEFORE LOADING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2 CONNECT POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2.1 Connection To 380 / 460 VAC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2.2 Connection To 190 / 230 VAC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.3 ADJUST FRESH AIR MAKEUP VENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.3.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.3.2 Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.3.3 Vent Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.4 EAUTOFRESH OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.4.1 eAutoFresh Pre-Trip Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.4.2 eAutoFresh Start-Up Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.4.3 eAutoFresh Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.5 CONNECT WATER-COOLED CONDENSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.5.1 Water-Cooled Condenser with Water Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.5.2 Water-Cooled Condenser with Condenser Fan Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.6 CONNECT REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7

iii T-340
 5.7 STARTING AND STOPPING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.7.1 Starting the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.7.2 Stopping the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.8 START-UP INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.8.1 Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.8.2 Check Controller Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.8.3 Start Temperature Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.8.4 Complete Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.9 PRE-TRIP DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.9.1 Prior to Starting a Pre-Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
5.9.2 Starting a Pre-Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
5.9.3 Displaying Pre-Trip Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–10
5.10 PROBE DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–10
5.11 EMERGENCY BYPASS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
5.12 AUTOMATIC COLD TREATMENT (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
5.13 AUTOMATIC SETPOINT CHANGE (ASC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.1 UNIT WILL NOT START OR STARTS THEN STOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.2 UNIT OPERATES LONG OR CONTINUOUSLY IN COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.3 UNIT RUNS BUT HAS INSUFFICIENT COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.4 UNIT WILL NOT HEAT OR HAS INSUFFICIENT HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.5 UNIT WILL NOT TERMINATE HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.6 UNIT WILL NOT DEFROST PROPERLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.7 ABNORMAL PRESSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.8 ABNORMAL NOISE OR VIBRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.9 MICROPROCESSOR MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.10 NO EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW OR RESTRICTED AIR FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.11 EAUTOFRESH NOT OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.12 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.13 AUTOTRANSFORMER MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.14 WATER-COOLED CONDENSER OR WATER PRESSURE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.15 COMPRESSOR OPERATING IN REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.16 ABNORMAL TEMPERATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
6.17 ABNORMAL CURRENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.1 SECTION LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.2 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.3 SERVICE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7.3.1 Connecting the Manifold Gauge Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.3.2 Removing the Manifold Gauge Set: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.4 PUMP DOWN THE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.5 REFRIGERANT LEAK CHECKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.6 EVACUATION AND DEHYDRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.6.1 General ................................................................ 7–5
7.6.2 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.6.3 Evacuate and Dehydrate - Complete System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.6.4 Evacuate and Dehydrate - Partial System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.7 REFRIGERANT CHARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.7.1 Checking the Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6

T-340 iv
 7.7.2 Adding Refrigerant to System (Full Charge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.7.3 Adding Refrigerant to System (Partial Charge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.8 COMPRESSOR ............................................................. 7–7
7.8.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.9 HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9
7.9.1 Checking High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9
7.9.2 Replacing High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
7.10 CONDENSER COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
7.11 CONDENSER FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.12 WATER-COOLED CONDENSER CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.13 FILTER DRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.13.1 Checking the Filter Drier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.13.2 Replacing the Filter Drier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
7.14 EVAPORATOR COIL & HEATER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
7.14.1 Evaporator Coil Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
7.14.2 Evaporator Heater Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
7.15 EVAPORATOR FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.15.1 Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.15.2 Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.15.3 Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.16 EVAPORATOR SECTION CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.17 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (EEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7.17.1 Removing an EEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7.17.2 Installing an EEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.18 ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE (ESV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.18.1 Removing a Solenoid Valve Coil: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.18.2 Removing the Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.18.3 Installing the Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.18.4 Installing the Solenoid Valve Coil: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.19 ECONOMIZER EXPANSION VALVE (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.19.1 Removing the Economizer Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.19.2 Installing the Economizer Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
7.20 DIGITAL UNLOADER VALVE (DUV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
7.20.1 Removing the DUV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
7.20.2 Installing the DUV: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.21 VALVE OVERRIDE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.22 AUTOTRANSFORMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
7.23 CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
7.23.1 Handling Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
7.23.2 Controller Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
7.23.3 Controller Programming Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.23.4 Removing and Installing a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
7.23.5 Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
7.24 TEMPERATURE SENSOR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
7.24.1 Sensor Checkout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
7.24.2 Sensor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
7.24.3 Sensors STS and SRS Reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
7.24.4 Sensors RRS and RTS Reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34

v T-340
 7.24.5 Sensor DTS Reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
7.24.6 Sensor CPDS Reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
7.25 VENT POSITION SENSOR (VPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
7.25.1 Upper VPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
7.25.2 Lower VPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
7.26 HUMIDITY SENSOR (HS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–36
7.26.1 Checking the Operation of the Humidity Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–36
7.26.2 ...................................................................... 7–38
7.27 EAUTOFRESH SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–38
7.27.1 Servicing the eAutoFresh Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–38
7.27.2 Checking eAutoFresh Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–38
7.27.3 Checking the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
7.27.4 Servicing the eAutoFresh Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
7.28 ELECTRONIC PARTLOW TEMPERATURE RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
7.28.1 Replacing the Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
7.28.2 Recalibrating the Temp Recorder to Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
7.29 MAINTENANCE OF PAINTED SURFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
7.30 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
7.30.1 Installing the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
8.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
INDEX .......................................................................... INDEX–1
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE NUMBER Page

Figure 3.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

Figure 3.2 Evaporator Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
Figure 3.3 Compressor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
Figure 3.4 Air-Cooled Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
Figure 3.5 Water-Cooled Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
Figure 3.6 Control Box Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
Figure 3.7 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Standard Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
Figure 3.8 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Standard Operation with Water-Cooled Condenser . . . . . . . . 3–12
Figure 3.9 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Economized Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
Figure 4.1 Temperature Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
Figure 4.2 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
Figure 4.3 Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
Figure 4.4 Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
Figure 4.5 Controller Operation - Perishable Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
Figure 4.6 Perishable Mode Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
Figure 4.7 Perishable Mode Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
Figure 4.8 Controller Operation - Frozen Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
Figure 4.9 Frozen Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
Figure 4.10 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
Figure 4.11 Standard Configuration Download Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–19
Figure 4.12 DataReader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
Figure 4.13 Alarm Troubleshooting Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–36
Figure 5.1 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
Figure 5.2 Upper Fresh Air Make Up Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
Figure 5.3 Diagram of Emergency Bypass Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
Figure 7.1 Manifold Gauge Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
Figure 7.2 R-134a Manifold Gauge/Hose Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
Figure 7.3 Service Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
Figure 7.4 Refrigeration System Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
Figure 7.5 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
Figure 7.6 High Pressure Switch Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
Figure 7.7 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning, Forced Circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
Figure 7.8 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning - Gravity Circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
Figure 7.9 5+1 Heater Arrangement - Omega Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
Figure 7.10 Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
Figure 7.11 Electronic Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
Figure 7.12 Coil View of Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
Figure 7.13 Economizer Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
Figure 7.14 View of Digital Unloader Valve (DUV) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
Figure 7.15 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
Figure 7.16 Controller Section of the Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
Figure 7.17 Sensor Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32

T-340 vii
Figure 7.18 Sensor and Cable Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
Figure 7.19 Supply Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
Figure 7.20 Return Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
Figure 7.21 Evaporator Temp Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
Figure 7.22 Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
Figure 7.23 Stepper Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–38
Figure 7.24 Jumper Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
Figure 7.25 Motor Cup Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
Figure 7.26 Electronic Partlow Temperature Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
Figure 7.27 Communications Interface Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
Figure 8.1 Legend for Standard Unit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
Figure 8.2 Schematic Diagram for Standard Unit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
Figure 8.3 Legend for Configuration With Available Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4
Figure 8.4 Schematic Diagram for Configuration With Available Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–5
Figure 8.5 Legend for Configuration With eAutoFresh and Emergency Bypass Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–6
Figure 8.6 Schematic Diagram for Configuration With eAutoFresh and Emergency Bypass Options . . . . . . 8–7
Figure 8.7 Schematic and Wiring Diagram for Upper Vent Position Sensor (VPS) Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–8
Figure 8.8 Schematic and Diagram for Lower Vent Position Sensor (VPS) Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–9
Figure 8.9 Unit Wiring Diagram for Standard Unit Configuration With 3-Phase Condenser Fan Motors . . . 8–10
Figure 8.10 Unit Wiring Diagram for Single Phase Condenser Fan Motor and Optional Heater . . . . . . . . . . 8–12
Figure 8.11 Unit Wiring Diagram for Configuration With eAutoFresh and Emergency Bypass Options . . . . 8–14

T-340 viii
 LIST OF TABLES
TABLE NUMBER Page

Table 3–1 Safety and Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9

Table 4–1 Keypad Function .............................................................. 4–2
Table 4–2 DataCORDER Configuration Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–19
Table 4–3 DataCORDER Standard Configurations ........................................... 4–20
Table 4–4 Controller Configuration Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–24
Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
Table 4–6 Controller Alarm Indications .................................................... 4–37
Table 4–7 Controller Pre-trip Test Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–46
Table 4–8 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments ........................................ 4–53
Table 4–9 DataCORDER Pre-trip Result Records ............................................ 4–54
Table 4–10 DataCORDER Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–55
Table 7–1 Valve Override Control Displays ................................................. 7–23
Table 7–2 Test Point Descriptions ........................................................ 7–24
Table 7–3 Sensor Resistance - AMBS, DTS, ETS, RRS, RTS, SRS, STS ......................... 7–30
Table 7–4 Sensor Resistance - PrimeLINE CPDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
Table 7–5 R-134a Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart .................................... 7–44
Table 7–6 Recommended Bolt Torque Values (Dry, Non-Lubricated for 18-8 Stainless Steel) . . . . . . . . . . 7–48

ix T-340
 SECTION 1
SAFETY SUMMARY

1.1 General Safety Notices

The following general safety notices supplement specific warnings and cautions appearing elsewhere in this man-
ual. They are recommended precautions that must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance
of the equipment covered herein. The general safety notices are presented in the following three sections labeled:
First Aid, Operating Precautions and Maintenance Precautions. A listing of the specific warnings and cautions
appearing elsewhere in the manual follows the general safety notices.

1.2 First Aid

An injury, no matter how slight, should never go unattended. Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately.

1.3 Operating Precautions

Always wear safety glasses.
Keep hands, clothing and tools clear of the evaporator and condenser fans.
No work should be performed on the unit until all circuit breakers and start-stop switches are turned off, and power
supply is disconnected.
In case of severe vibration or unusual noise, stop the unit and investigate.

1.4 Maintenance Precautions

Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and condenser fans. Do not open the condenser fan grille or
evaporator access panels before turning power off, disconnecting and securing the power plug.
Be sure power is turned off before working on motors, controllers, solenoid valves and electrical control switches.
Tag circuit breaker and power supply to prevent accidental energizing of circuit.
Do not bypass any electrical safety devices, e.g. bridging an overload, or using any sort of jumper wires. Problems
with the system should be diagnosed, and any necessary repairs performed by qualified service personnel.
When performing any arc welding on the unit or container, disconnect all wire harness connectors from the mod-
ules in control boxes. Do not remove wire harness from the modules unless you are grounded to the unit frame
with a static safe wrist strap.
In case of electrical fire, open circuit switch and extinguish with CO2 (never use water).

1.5 Specific Hazard Statements

To help identify the label hazards on the unit and explain the level of awareness each one carries, an explanation is
given with the appropriate consequences:
DANGER - an immediate hazard that WILL result in severe personal injury or death.
WARNING - to warn against hazards or unsafe conditions that COULD result in severe personal injury or death.
CAUTION - to warn against potential hazard or unsafe practice that could result in personal injury, product or prop-
erty damage.
The statements listed below are applicable to the refrigeration unit and appear elsewhere in this manual. These
recommended precautions must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance of the equipment
covered herein.

! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD: Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage. Never use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak
testing or operating the product. Charge Only With R-134a: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI
Standard 700 specification.

1–1 T-340
 ! WARNING
Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and condenser fans. The unit may cycle the
fans and compressor unexpectedly as control requirements dictate.

! WARNING
Do not attempt to remove power plug(s) before turning OFF start-stop switch (ST), unit circuit
breaker(s) and external power source.

! WARNING
Make sure the power plugs are clean and dry before connecting to power receptacle.

! WARNING
Make sure that the unit circuit breaker(s) (CB-1 & CB-2) and the START-STOP switch (ST) are in
the “O” (OFF) position before connecting to any electrical power source.

! WARNING
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and power plug disconnected before replacing the compressor.

! WARNING
Before disassembly of the compressor, be sure to relieve the internal pressure very carefully
by slightly loosening the couplings to break the seal.

! WARNING
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a pressure regulator.

! WARNING
Do not open the condenser fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting power plug.

! WARNING
Oakite No. 32 is an acid. Be sure that the acid is slowly added to the water. DO NOT PUT
WATER INTO THE ACID - this will cause spattering and excessive heat.

! WARNING
Wear rubber gloves and wash the solution from the skin immediately if accidental contact
occurs. Do not allow the solution to splash onto concrete.

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply
before working on moving parts.

T-340 1–2
 ! WARNING
Installation requires wiring to the main unit circuit breaker, CB1.Make sure the power to the
unit is off and power plug disconnected before beginning installation.

! CAUTION
Charge water-cooled condenser or receiver according to nameplate specifications to ensure
optimal unit performance.

! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from controller modules unless you are grounded to the unit
frame with a static safe wrist strap.

! CAUTION
Unplug all controller module wire harness connectors before performing arc welding on any
part of the container.

! CAUTION
Do not attempt to use anML2i PC card in an ML3 equipped unit. The PC cards are physically
different and will result in damage to the controller.

! CAUTION
Pre-trip inspection should not be performed with critical temperature cargoes in the container.

! CAUTION
When Pre-Trip key is pressed, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode will be deactivated. At
the completion of Pre-Trip activity, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated.

! CAUTION
When condenser water flow is below 11 lpm (3 gpm) or when water-cooled operation is not in
use, the CFS switch MUST be set to position “1” or the unit will not operate properly.

! CAUTION
When a failure occurs during automatic testing, the unit will suspend operation awaiting oper-
ator intervention.

! CAUTION
When Pre-Trip test Auto 2 runs to completion without being interrupted, the unit will terminate
pre-trip and display “Auto 2” “end.” The unit will suspend operation until the user depresses
the ENTER key!

1–3 T-340
 ! CAUTION
The unit will remain in the full cooling mode as long as the EB switch is in the On position and
the Mode Switch is in the Full Cool position. If the cargo can be damaged by low temperatures,
the operator must monitor container temperature and manually cycle operation as required to
maintain temperature within required limits.

! CAUTION
Allowing the scroll compressor to operate in reverse for more than two minutes will result in
internal compressor damage. Turn the start-stop switch OFF immediately.

! CAUTION
To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in the manifold gauge set be sure set is brought to suc-
tion pressure before disconnecting.

! CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low suction pressure very quickly. Do not use the compressor
to evacuate the system below 0 psig. Never operate the compressor with the suction or dis-
charge service valves closed (front seated). Internal damage will result from operating the
compressor in a deep vacuum.

! CAUTION
Take necessary steps (place plywood over coil or use sling on motor) to prevent motor from
falling into condenser coil.

! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from module unless you are grounded to the unit frame with a
static safe wrist strap.

! CAUTION
Unplug all module connectors before performing arc welding on any part of the container.

! CAUTION
The unit must be OFF whenever a programming card is inserted or removed from the controller
programming port.

! CAUTION
Use care when cutting wire ties to avoid nicking or cutting wires.

! CAUTION
Do not allow moisture to enter wire splice area as this may affect sensor resistance.

T-340 1–4
 SECTION 2
INTRODUCTION
2.1 Introduction
The Carrier Transicold model 69NT40-561-001 to 199 series units are of lightweight aluminum frame construction,
designed to fit in the front of a container and serve as the container’s front wall.
They are one piece, self- contained, all electric units, which include cooling and heating systems to provide precise
temperature control.
The units are supplied with a complete charge of refrigerant R-134a and compressor lubricating oil, and are ready
for operation upon installation. Forklift pockets are provided for unit installation and removal.
The base unit operates on nominal 380/460 volt, 3-phase, 50/60 hertz (Hz) power. An optional autotransformer
may be fitted to allow operation on nominal 190/230, 3-phase, 50/60 Hz power. Control system power is provided
by a transformer which steps the supply power down to 18 and 24 volts, single phase.
The controller is a Carrier Transicold Micro-Link 3 microprocessor. The controller operates automatically to select
cooling, holding or heating as required to maintain the desired set point temperature within very close limits. The
unit may also be equipped with an electronic temperature recorder.
The controller has a keypad and display for viewing or changing operating parameters. The display is also
equipped with lights to indicate various modes of operation.

2.2 Configuration Identification

Unit identification information is provided on a plate located to the left of the receiver or water-cooled condenser, on
the back wall of the condenser section. The plate provides the unit model number, the unit serial number and the
unit parts identification number (PID). The model number identifies the overall unit configuration, while the PID
number provides information on specific optional equipment, factory provisioned to allow for field installation of
optional equipment and differences in detailed parts.

2.3 Feature Descriptions

2.3.1 Control Box
Units are equipped with either an aluminum or composite material box, and may be fitted with a lockable door.
2.3.2 Temperature Readout
The unit is fitted with suction and discharge temperature sensors. The sensor readings may be viewed on the con-
troller display.
2.3.3 Pressure Readout
The unit is fitted with evaporator and discharge transducers. The transducer readings may be viewed on the con-
troller display.
2.3.4 Compressor
The unit is fitted with a scroll compressor equipped with suction and discharge service connections.
2.3.5 Condenser Coil
The unit is fitted with a four-row condenser coil using 7mm tubing.
2.3.6 Evaporator
The evaporator section is equipped with an electronic expansion valve (EEV).
2.3.7 Evaporator Fan Operation
Units are equipped with three-phase evaporator fan motors. Opening of an evaporator fan internal protector will
shut down the unit.
2.3.8 Plate Set
Each unit is equipped with a tethered set of wiring schematics and wiring diagram plates. The plate sets are
ordered using a seven-digit base part number and a two-digit dash number.

2–1 T-340
2.4 Option Descriptions
Various options may be factory or field equipped to the base unit. These options are described in the following sub-
paragraphs.
2.4.1 Battery
The refrigeration controller may be fitted with standard replaceable batteries or a rechargeable battery pack.
Rechargeable battery packs may be fitted in the standard location or in a secure location.
2.4.2 Dehumidification
The unit may be fitted with a humidity sensor. This sensor allows setting of a humidity set point in the controller. In
dehumidification mode, the controller will operate to reduce internal container moisture level.
2.4.3 USDA
The unit may be supplied with fittings for additional temperature probes, which allow recording of USDA Cold
Treatment data by the integral DataCORDER function of the Micro-Link refrigeration controller.
2.4.4 Interrogator
Units that use the DataCORDER function are fitted with interrogator receptacles for connection of equipment to
download the recorded data. Two receptacles may be fitted; one is accessible from the front of the container and
the other is mounted inside the container (with the USDA receptacles).
2.4.5 Remote Monitoring
The unit may be fitted with a remote monitoring receptacle. This item allows connection of remote indicators for COOL,
DEFROST and IN RANGE. Unless otherwise indicated, the receptacle is mounted at the control box location.
2.4.6 Quest - CCPC
Compressor-Cycle Perishable Cooling (CCPC) is a method of temperature control used during steady-state perish-
able cooling that cycles the compressor on and off according to supply / return air temperature conditions.
2.4.7 Communications Interface Module
The unit may be fitted with a communications interface module. The communications interface module is a slave
module, which allows communication with a master central monitoring station. The module will respond to commu-
nication and return information over the main power line. Refer to the ship master system technical manual for fur-
ther information.
2.4.8 Autotransformer
An autotransformer may be provided to allow operation on 190/230, 3-phase, 50/60 Hz power. The autotrans-
former raises the supply voltage to the nominal 380/460 volt power required by the base unit. The autotransformer
may also be fitted with an individual circuit breaker for the 230 volt power.
If the unit is equipped with an autotransformer and communications module, the autotransformer will be fitted with
a transformer bridge unit (TBU) to assist in communications.

2.4.9 Temperature Recorder

The unit may be fitted with an electronic temperature recording device.
2.4.10 Gutters
Rain gutters may be fitted over the control box and recorder section to divert rain away from the controls. The dif-
ferent gutters include standard length bolted gutters, extended length gutters, and riveted gutters.
2.4.11 Handles
The unit may be equipped with handles to facilitate access to stacked containers. These fixed handles are located
on either side of the unit.
2.4.12 Thermometer Port
The unit may be fitted with ports in the front of the frame for insertion of a thermometer to measure supply and/or
return air temperature. If fitted, the port(s) will require a cap and chain.

T-340 2–2
2.4.13 Water Cooling
The refrigeration system may be fitted with a water-cooled condenser. The condenser is constructed using copper-
nickel tube for sea water applications. The water-cooled condenser is in series with the air cooled condenser and
replaces the standard unit receiver. When operating on the water-cooled condenser, the condenser fan is deacti-
vated by a water pressure switch or condenser fan switch.
2.4.14 Back Panels
Aluminum back panels may have access doors and/or hinge mounting.
2.4.15 460 Volt Cable
Various power cable and plug designs are available for the main 460 volt supply. The plug options tailor the cables
to each customer’s requirements.
2.4.16 230 Volt Cable
Units equipped with an autotransformer require an additional power cable for connection to the 230 volt source.
Various power cable and plug designs are available. The plug options tailor the cables to each customer’s require-
ments.
2.4.17 Cable Restraint
Various designs are available for storage of the power cables. These options are variations of the compressor sec-
tion cable guard.
2.4.18 Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up)
The unit may be fitted with an upper fresh air makeup assembly. The fresh air makeup assembly is available with a
vent positioning sensor (VPS) and may also be fitted with screens.
2.4.19 Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up)
The unit may be fitted with a lower fresh air makeup assembly. The fresh air makeup assembly is available with a
vent positioning sensor (VPS) and may also be fitted with screens.
2.4.20 Labels
Safety Instruction and Function Code listing labels differ depending on the options installed. Labels available with
additional languages are listed in the parts list.
2.4.21 Controller
Two replacement controllers are available:
1. Re-manufactured - Controller is the equivalent of a new OEM controller and is supplied with a 12-month
warranty.
2. Repaired - Controller has had previous faults repaired and upgraded with the latest software.

NOTE
Repaired controllers are NOT to be used for warranty repairs; only full OEM Re-manufactured controllers
are to be used.
Controllers will be factory-equipped with the latest version of operational software, but will NOT be configured for a
specific model number and will need to be configured at the time of installation or sale.
2.4.22 Condenser Grille
Two styles of condenser grilles are available: direct bolted grilles and hinged grilles.
2.4.23 Emergency Bypass
The optional Emergency Bypass switch (EB) functions to bypass the controller in the event of controller failure.
2.4.24 eAutoFresh
The optional eAutoFresh venting system moderates the atmospheric level inside the container unit in response to
cargo respiration.

2–3 T-340
 SECTION 3
DESCRIPTION
3.1 General Description
3.1.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section
The unit is designed so that the majority of the components are accessible from the front (see Figure 3.1). The unit
model number, serial number and parts identification number can be found on the unit nameplate to the left of the
receiver or water-cooled condenser on the back wall of the condenser section.
Figure 3.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section

19

18
1

17
2

16

15

14

13

12
4
11 10
9
8
7 6 5

1) Access Panel (Evaporator Fan #1) 11) Condenser Fan

2) Fork Lift Pockets 12) Autotransformer location
3) Control Box 13) TransFRESH Communications Connector
4) Compressor 14) Interrogator Connector (Front left)
5) Ambient Sensor (AMBS) 15) Temperature Recorder
6) Economizer 16) Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent location
7) Filter Drier 17) TIR (Transports Internationaux Routiers) Sealing
8) Receiver or Water Cooled Condenser Provisions - Typical All Panels
9) Unit Nameplate (Serial Number, Model Number 18) Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent or eAutoFresh
and Parts Identification (PID) Number) (Automatic Vent) panel
10) Power Cables and Plug location 19) Access Panel (Evaporator Fan #2)
-----

3–1 T-340
3.1.2 Fresh Air Makeup Vent
The function of the upper or lower fresh air makeup vent is to provide ventilation for commodities that require fresh air
circulation. A manually operated venting system is located in the upper left access panel. The optional eAutoFresh
vent system moderates the atmospheric level in the container in response to cargo respiration. When transporting fro-
zen cargo loads, the vent will be closed. The upper left access panel contains the vent slide and motor assembly. It
may be removed to allow entry into the evaporator section where the CO2 sensor and drive pack are located.
3.1.3 Evaporator Section
The evaporator section (see Figure 3.2) contains the return temperature sensor (RTS), humidity sensor (HS), elec-
tronic expansion valve (EEV), dual speed evaporator fans (EM1 and EM2), evaporator coil and heaters, defrost tem-
perature sensor (DTS), heat termination thermostat (HTT) and evaporator temperature sensors (ETS1 and ETS2).
Figure 3.2 Evaporator Section

15
14

13

12 4
3
11 2
1

16
9

10

21
20
6
19
18

17

8 5

1) Evaporator Fan #1 11) Air Filter

2) Return Recorder Sensor (RRS) / Return Tempera- 12) CO2 Sensor Sensing Line
ture Sensor (RTS) 13) CO2 Sensor (COS)
3) Humidity Sensor (HS) 14) CO2 Sensor Outlet Line
4) Evaporator Fan #2 15) Stepper Motor Drive (SD)
5) Evaporator Coil 16) Stepper Motor (AF)
6) Evaporator Coil Heaters 17) Interrogator Connector Rear (ICR)
7) Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT) 18) USDA Probe Receptacle PR2
8) Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) 19) USDA Probe Receptacle PR1
9) Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) 20) USDA Probe Receptacle PR3
10) Evaporator Temperature Sensors (ETS1 & ETS2) 21) Cargo Probe Receptacle PR4
-----

T-340 3–2
The evaporator fans circulate air through the container by pulling it in the top of the unit, directing it through the
evaporator coil, where it is heated or cooled, and discharging it at the bottom.
If the unit is equipped with eAutoFresh, system components are mounted in addition to the standard refrigeration
unit components. The stepper motor component is installed in the vent; the air filter, CO2 sensor, stepper motor
drive and CO2 sensing lines are installed on the rib of the upper grill.
Most evaporator components are accessible by removing the upper rear panel or by removing the evaporator fan
access panels (see Figure 3.1, Items 1 and 19).
3.1.4 Compressor Section
The compressor section (see Figure 3.3) includes the compressor, digital unloader valve (DUV), high pressure
switch, discharge pressure transducer (DPT), evaporator pressure transducer (EPT) and the suction pressure
transducer (SPT). The supply temperature sensor (STS), supply recorder sensor (SRS), and ambient sensor are
located to the left of the compressor.
Figure 3.3 Compressor Section

16

11
2
1
3
10

12
9
13
8

14 4

15

1) Compressor 9) Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)

2) Discharge Temperature Sensor (CPDS) location 10) Digital Unloader Valve (DUV)
3) Discharge Connection 11) Evaporator Pressure Transducer (EPT)
4) Suction Connection Location 12) Discharge Service Valve
5) Compressor Terminal Box 13) High Pressure Switch (HPS)
6) Oil Drain location 14) Warning Label
7) Economizer Connection 15) Suction Service Valve
8) Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) 16) Supply Temperature Sensor (STS) / Supply
Recorder Sensor (SRS)
-----

3–3 T-340
3.1.5 Air-Cooled Condenser Section
The air-cooled condenser section (see Figure 3.4) consists of the condenser fan, condenser coil, receiver, liquid
line service valve, filter drier, fusible plug, economizer, economizer expansion valve (EXV), economizer solenoid
valve (ESV), and sight glass / moisture indicator. The condenser fan pulls air from around the coil and discharges it
horizontally through the condenser fan grille.
Figure 3.4 Air-Cooled Condenser Section

4
2 3

8 9 10

16 11

15 12
14 13

1) Grille and Venturi Assembly 9) Filter Drier

2) Condenser Fan 10) Economizer
3) Key 11) Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
4) Condenser Fan Motor 12) Economizer Expansion Valve (EXV)
5) Condenser Coil 13) Warning Label location
6) Condenser Coil Cover 14) Service Access Valve
7) Receiver 15) Liquid Level / Moisture Indicator
8) Sight Glass 16) Fusible Plug
-----

T-340 3–4
3.1.6 Water-Cooled Condenser Section
The water-cooled condenser section (see Figure 3.5) consists of a water-cooled condenser, sight glass, rupture
disc, filter drier, water couplings, water pressure switch, economizer, economizer expansion valve, economizer
solenoid valve (ESV), and moisture / liquid indicator. The water-cooled condenser replaces the standard unit
receiver.
Figure 3.5 Water-Cooled Condenser Section

2 3 4 5

7
12 11 10 9 8

1) Water-Cooled Condenser 7) Economizer Expansion Valve (EXV)

2) Rupture Disc 8) Coupling (Water In)
3) Moisture / Liquid Indicator 9) Liquid Line Service Valve / Connection
4) Filter Drier 10) Self Draining Coupling (Water Out)
5) Economizer 11) Water Pressure Switch (WP)
6) Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) 12) Sight Glass
-----

3–5 T-340
3.1.7 Control Box Section
The control box (see Figure 3.6) includes: the manual operation switches, circuit breaker (CB-1), compressor, fan
and heater contactors, control power transformer, fuses, keypad, display module, current sensor module, controller
module and the communications interface module.
Figure 3.6 Control Box Section

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

10

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11

1) Compressor Contactor (CH) 10) Start-Stop Switch (ST)

2) Compressor Phase A Contactor (PA) 11) Controller Battery Pack standard Location
3) Compressor Phase B Contactor (PB) 12) Interrogator Connector box location
4) Heater Contactor (HR) 13) Control Transformer
5) Display Module 14) High Speed Evaporator Fan Contactor (EF)
6) Communications Interface Module 15) Low Speed Evaporator Fan Contactor (ES)
7) Controller / DataCORDER Module 16) Condenser Fan Contactor (CF)
8) Keypad 17) Circuit Breaker 460V
9) Remote Monitoring Receptacle 18) Current Sensor Module
-----
3.1.8 Communications Interface Module
The communications interface module is a slave module which allows communication between the refrigeration
unit and a ship system master central monitoring station. The module will respond to communication and return
information over the ships main power line. Refer to the master system technical manual for further information.

T-340 3–6
3.2 Refrigeration System Data

Compressor / Motor Assembly Model Number ZMD26KVE-TFD-272

Weight (With Oil) 42.9 kg (95 lb)
Approved Oil Uniqema Emkarate RL-32-3MAF
Oil Charge 1774 ml (60 ounces)
Electronic Expansion Valve Verify at -18°C 4.4 to 6.7°C (8 to 12°F)
(EEV) Superheat Evaporator (0F) container box
temperature
Economizer Expansion Valve Verify at -18°C 4.4 to 11.1°C (8 to 20°F)
(EXV) Superheat (0F) container box
temperature
Heater Termination Thermo- Opens 54° (+/- 3) C = 130° (+/- 5) F
stat (HTT)
Closes 38° (+/- 4) C = 100° (+/- 7) F
High Pressure Switch (HPS) Cut-Out 25 (+/- 1.0) kg/cm2 = 350 (+/- 10) psig
Cut-In 18 (+/- 0.7) kg/cm2 = 250 (+/- 10) psig

! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD: Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage.
Never use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak testing or operating the product.
Charge Only With R-134a: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI Standard 700 specification.
Refrigerant R-134a Conforming to AHRI standard 700 specifications.

! CAUTION
Charge water-cooled condenser or receiver according to nameplate specifications to ensure
optimal unit performance.
Refrigerant Charge Water-Cooled Condenser 5.44 kg (12 lbs)
Receiver 4.99 kg (11 lbs)
Fusible Plug Melting point 99°C = (210°F)
Torque 6.2 to 6.9 mkg (45 to 50 ft-lbs)
Rupture Disc Bursts at 35 +/- 5% kg/cm2 = (500 +/- 5% psig)
Torque 6.2 to 6.9 mkg (45 to 50 ft-lbs)
Unit Weight Refer to unit model number plate.
Water Pressure Switch (WPS) Cut-In 0.5 +/- 0.2 kg/cm2 (7 +/- 3 psig)
Cut-Out 1.6 +/- 0.4 kg/cm2 (22 +/- 5 psig)

3.3 Electrical Data

Circuit Breaker CB-1 (25 amp) Trips at 29 amps
CB-2 (50 amp) Trips at 62.5 amps
CB-2 (70 amp) Trips at 87.5 amps
Compressor Motor (CP) Full Load Amps (FLA) 13 amps @ 460 VAC

3–7 T-340
Condenser Fan Motor 380 VAC, Three Phase, 50 460 VAC, Three Phase, 60
(CM) Hz Hz
Full Load Amps 1.3 amps 1.6 amps
Horsepower 0.43 hp 0.75 hp
Rotations Per Minute 1425 rpm 1725 rpm
Voltage and Frequency 360 - 460 VAC +/- 2.5 Hz 400 - 500 VAC +/- 2.5 Hz
Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required.
Rotation Counter-clockwise when viewed from shaft end.
Evaporator Coil Heaters Number of Heaters 6
Rating 750 watts +5/-10% each @ 230 VAC
Resistance (cold) 66.8 to 77.2 ohms @ 20°C (68°F)
Type Sheath
Evaporator Fan Motors 380 VAC, Three Phase, 50 460 VAC, Three Phase, 60
(EM) Hz Hz
Full Load Amps 1.0 1.2
High Speed
Full Load Amps 0.6 0.6
Low Speed
Nominal Horsepower 0.49 0.84
High Speed
Nominal Horsepower 0.06 0.11
Low Speed
Rotations Per Minute 2850 rpm 3450 rpm
High Speed
Rotations Per Minute 1425 rpm 1725 rpm
Low Speed
Voltage and Frequency 360 - 460 VAC +/- 1.25 Hz 400 - 500 VAC +/- 1.5 Hz
Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required
Rotation CW when viewed from shaft end
Fuses Control Circuit 7.5 amps (F3A,F3B)
Controller / DataCORDER 5 amps (F1 & F2)
Emergency Bypass 10 amps (FEB)
Vent Position Sensor Electrical Output 0.5 VDC to 4.5 VDC over 90 degree range
(VPS) Supply Voltage 5 VDC +/- 10%
Supply Current 5 mA (typical)
Solenoid Valve Coils Nominal Resistance @ 7.7 ohms +/- 5%
(ESV) 24 VDC 77°F (25°C)
Maximum Current Draw 0.7 amps
Digital Unloader Valve Nominal Resistance @ 14.8 ohms +/- 5%
(DUV) Coils 12 VDC 77°F (20°C)
Maximum Current Draw 929 mA
Electronic Expansion Coil Feed to Ground 47 ohms
Valve (EEV) Nominal Re- (Gray Wire)
sistance Coil Feed to Coil Feed 95 ohms

T-340 3–8
Humidity Sensor (HS) Orange wire Power
Red wire Output
Brown wire Ground
Input voltage 5 VDC
Output voltage 0 to 3.3 VDC
Output voltage readings verses relative humidity (RH) percentage:
30% 0.99 V
50% 1.65 V
70% 2.31 V
90% 2.97 V
Controller Setpoint Range -30 to +30°C (-22 to +86°F)

3.4 Safety and Protective Devices

Unit components are protected from damage by safety and protective devices listed in Table 3–1. These devices moni-
tor the unit operating conditions and open a set of electrical contacts when an unsafe condition occurs.
Open safety switch contacts on either or both of devices IP-CP or HPS will shut down the compressor.
Open safety switch contacts on device IP-CM will shut down the condenser fan motor.
The entire refrigeration unit will shut down if one of the following safety devices open: (a) circuit breaker(s); (b) fuse
(F3A/F3B, 7.5A); or (c) evaporator fan motor internal protector(s) - (IP).

Table 3–1 Safety and Protective Devices

Unsafe Condition Device Device Setting
Circuit Breaker (CB-1, 25 amp) - Manual Reset Trips at 29 amps (460 VAC)
Excessive current draw Circuit Breaker (CB-2, 50 amp) - Manual Reset Trips at 62.5 amps (230 VAC)
Circuit Breaker (CB-2, 70 amp) - Manual Reset Trips at 87.5 amps (230 VAC)
Excessive current draw in the Fuse (F3A & F3B) 7.5 amp rating
control circuit
Excessive current draw by the Fuse (F1 & F2) 5 amp rating
controller
Excessive current draw by the Fuse (FEB) 10 amp rating
Emergency Bypass module
Excessive condenser fan motor Internal Protector (IP-CM) - Automatic Reset N/A
winding temperature
Excessive compressor motor Internal Protector (IP-CP) - Automatic Reset N/A
winding temperature
Excessive evaporator fan mo- Internal Protector(s) (IP-EM) - Automatic Reset N/A
tor(s) winding temperature
Abnormal pressures / tempera- Fusible Plug - For Receiver 99°C = (210°F)
tures in the high refrigerant side Rupture Disc - For Water-Cooled Condenser 35 kg/cm2 = (500 psig)
Abnormally high discharge High Pressure Switch (HPS) Opens at 25 kg/cm2
pressure (350 psig)

3–9 T-340
3.5 Refrigeration Circuit
3.5.1 Standard Operation
Starting at the compressor (see Figure 3.7) the suction gas is compressed to a higher pressure and temperature.
The refrigerant gas flows through the discharge line and continues into the air-cooled condenser. When operating
with the air-cooled condenser active, air flowing across the coil fins and tubes cools the gas to saturation tempera-
ture. By removing latent heat, the gas condenses to a high pressure / high temperature liquid and flows to the
receiver, which stores the additional charge necessary for low temperature operation.
When operating with the water-cooled condenser active (see Figure 3.8), the refrigerant gas passes through the
air-cooled condenser and enters the water-cooled condenser shell. The water flowing inside the tubing cools the
gas to saturation temperature in the same manner as the air passing over the air-cooled condenser. The refrigerant
condenses on the outside of the tubes and exits as a high temperature liquid. The water-cooled condenser also
acts as a receiver, storing refrigerant for low temperature operation.
The liquid refrigerant continues through the liquid line, the filter drier (which keeps refrigerant clean and dry) and
the economizer (not active during standard operation) to the electronic expansion valve (EEV).
As the liquid refrigerant passes through the variable orifice of the EEV, the pressure drops to suction pressure. In
this process some of the liquid vaporizes to a gas (flash gas), removing heat from the remaining liquid. The liquid
exits as a low pressure, low temperature, saturated mix. Heat is then absorbed from the return air by the balance of
the liquid, causing it to vaporize in the evaporator coil. The vapor then flows through the suction tube back to the
compressor.
On systems fitted with a water pressure switch, the condenser fan will be off when there is sufficient pressure to
open the switch. If water pressure drops below the switch cut out setting, the condenser fan will automatically start.
During the standard mode of operation, the normally closed digital unloader valve (DUV) controls the system refrig-
erant flow and capacity by loading and unloading the compressor in frequent discrete time intervals. If the system
capacity has been decreased to the lowest allowable capacity with the DUV, the unit will enter a trim heat mode of
operation, during which the controller will pulse the evaporator heaters in sequence with the compressor digital sig-
nal in order to absorb the excess capacity.
3.5.2 Economized Operation
In the economized mode (see Figure 3.9) the frozen and pull down capacity of the unit is increased by sub-cooling
the liquid refrigerant entering the electronic expansion valve. Overall efficiency is increased because the gas leaving
the economizer enters the compressor at a higher pressure, therefore requiring less energy to compress it to the
required condensing conditions.
Liquid refrigerant for use in the economizer circuit is taken from the main liquid line as it leaves the filter drier. The
flow is activated when the controller energizes the economizer solenoid valve (ESV).
The liquid refrigerant flows through the ESV to the expansion valve internal passages, absorbing heat from the liq-
uid refrigerant flowing to the electronic expansion valve. The resultant “medium” temperature/pressure gas enters
the compressor at the economizer port fitting.
When the control air temperature falls to 2.0°C (3.6°F) above set point, the DUV unloads the compressor’s scroll
and begins to reduce the capacity of the unit. Percentage of the unit capacity is accessed through code select 01
(Cd01). For example, if Cd01 displays 70, it indicates that the compressor is operating unloaded with the DUV
engaged 30% of the time.
3.5.3 Electronic Expansion Valve
The microprocessor controls the superheat leaving the evaporator via the electronic expansion valve (EEV), based
on inputs from the evaporator pressure transducer (EPT). The microprocessor transmits electronic pulses to the
EEV stepper motor, which opens or closes the valve orifice to maintain the superheat set point.

T-340 3–10
 Figure 3.7 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Standard Operation

17
16

15

18

14
3
13

4 2
6
12
19
7
10 20
1
11
8

21
9

DISCHARGE LIQUID SUCTION

1) Compressor 12) Economizer TXV

2) Discharge Service Valve 13) Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
3) Discharge Temperature Sensor (CPDS) 14) Economizer TXV Sensing Bulb
4) Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) 15) Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
5) Condenser 16) Evaporator
6) Receiver 17) Evaporator Temperature Sensors (ETS1 & ETS2)
7) Receiver Sight Glass 18) Digital Unloader Valve (DUV)
8) Receiver Liquid Level / Moisture Indicator 19) Evaporator Pressure Transducer (EPT)
9) Liquid Line Service Valve 20) Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
10) Filter Drier 21) Suction Service Valve
11) Economizer
-----

3–11 T-340
 Figure 3.8 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Standard Operation with Water-Cooled Condenser

16
15

14

17

3
13

4 2

12
18

10 6 19
1
11 8

20
7
9

DISCHARGE LIQUID SUCTION

1) Compressor 11) Economizer

2) Discharge Service Valve 12) Economizer TXV
3) Discharge Temperature Sensor (CPDS) 13) Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
4) Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) 14) Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
5) Condenser 15) Evaporator
6) Water-Cooled Condenser (WCC) 16) Evaporator Temperature Sensors (ETS1 & ETS2)
7) Sight Glass 17) Digital Unloader Valve (DUV)
8) Moisture Indicator 18) Evaporator Pressure Transducer (EPT)
9) Liquid Line Service Valve 19) Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
10) Filter Drier 20) Suction Service Valve
-----

T-340 3–12
 Figure 3.9 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Economized Operation

7
6

2
5

1
4

LIQUID ECONOMIZER
PRESSURE

1) Compressor 5) Economizer TXV

2) Receiver 6) Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
3) Liquid Line Service Valve 7) Economizer TXV Sensing Bulb
4) Economizer 8) Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
-----

3–13 T-340
 SECTION 4
MICROPROCESSOR

4.1 Temperature Control Microprocessor System

The temperature control Micro-Link 3 microprocessor system (see Figure 4.1) consists of a keypad, display mod-
ule, the control module (controller) and interconnecting wiring. The controller houses the temperature control soft-
ware and the DataCORDER software. The temperature control software functions to operate the unit components
as required to provide the desired cargo temperature and humidity.
The DataCORDER software functions to record unit operating parameters and cargo temperature parameters for
future retrieval. Coverage of the temperature control software begins with Section 4.2. Coverage of the Data-
CORDER software is provided in Section 4.8.
The keypad and display module serve to provide user access and readouts for both of the controller functions, tem-
perature control and DataCORDER. The functions are accessed by keypad selections and viewed on the display
module. The components are designed to permit ease of installation and removal.

Figure 4.1 Temperature Control System

4–1 T-340
4.1.1 Keypad
The keypad (see Figure 4.2) is mounted on the right-hand side of the control box. The keypad consists of eleven
push button switches that act as the user’s interface with the controller. Descriptions of the switch functions are
provided in Table 4–1.
Figure 4.2 Keypad Table 4–1 Keypad Function
Key Function
CODE Accesses function codes.
CODE PRE SELECT
SELECT TRIP Displays Pre-trip selection menu.
PRE TRIP
Discontinues Pre-trip in progress.
Displays alarm list and clears the
ALARM LIST
MANUAL alarm queue.
ALARM
DEFROST/ Displays selected defrost mode.
LIST
INTERVAL Depress and hold the MANUAL DE-
MANUAL
FROST / INTERVAL key for five (5)
DEFROST /
seconds to initiate defrost using the
INTERVAL
same logic as if the optional manual
defrost switch was toggled on.
Confirms a selection or saves a selec-
ENTER
tion to the controller.
ENTER Change or scroll a selection up. Pre-
Arrow Up
trip advance or test interrupt.
Change or scroll selection downward.
Arrow Down
Pre-trip repeat backward.
RETURN / Display non-controlling probe tem-
SUPPLY perature (momentary display).
Display alternate English/Metric scale
(momentary display). When set to F,
pressure is displayed in psig and vac-
Celsius / uum in “/hg.” “P” appears after the val-
Fahrenheit ue to indicate psig and “i” appears for
RETURN C inches of mercury. When set to C,
SUPPLY F pressure readings are in bars. “b” ap-
pears after the value to indicate bars.
Initiate battery backup mode to allow
BATTERY
set point & function code selection if
BATTERY ALT POWER
AC power is not connected.
POWER MODE This key is pressed to switch the func-
tions from temperature software to
the DataCORDER software. The re-
ALT MODE maining keys function the same as
described above except the readings
or changes are made to the Data-
CORDER programming.

4.1.2 Display Module

The display module (see Figure 4.3) consists of two 5-digit displays and seven indicator lights. The indicator lights
include:
• COOL - White or Blue LED: Energized when the refrigerant compressor is energized.
• HEAT - Orange LED: Energized to indicate heater operation in heat mode, defrost mode, or dehumidification.
• DEFROST - Orange LED: Energized when the unit is in defrost mode.
• IN RANGE - Green LED: Energized when the controlled temperature probe is within the specified tolerance
of set point.

T-340 4–2
 NOTE
The controlling probe in perishable range is the SUPPLY air probe and the controlling probe in frozen
range is the RETURN air probe.
• SUPPLY - Yellow LED: Energized when the supply air probe is used for control. When this LED is illumi-
nated, the temperature displayed in the AIR TEMPERATURE display is the reading at the supply air probe.
This LED will flash if dehumidification or humidification is enabled.
• RETURN - Yellow LED: Energized when the return air probe is used for control. When this LED is illumi-
nated, the temperature displayed in the AIR TEMPERATURE display is the reading at the return air probe.
• ALARM - Red LED: Energized when an active or an inactive shutdown alarm in the alarm queue.

Figure 4.3 Display Module

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

4.1.3 Controller

! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from controller modules unless you are grounded to the unit
frame with a static safe wrist strap.

! CAUTION
Unplug all controller module wire harness connectors before performing arc welding on any
part of the container.

! CAUTION
Do not attempt to use anML2i PC card in an ML3 equipped unit. The PC cards are physically
different and will result in damage to the controller.

NOTE
Do not attempt to service the controller modules. Breaking the seal will void the warranty.
The Micro-Link 3 controller (see Figure 4.4) is fitted with test points, harness connectors and a software card pro-
gramming port.

4.2 Controller Software

The controller software is a custom designed program that is subdivided into configuration software and opera-
tional software. The controller software performs the following functions:
• Control supply or return air temperature to required limits, provide modulated refrigeration operation, econo-
mized operation, unloaded operation, electric heat control, and defrost. Defrost is performed to clear buildup
of frost and ice to ensure proper air flow across the evaporator coil.
• Provide default independent readouts of set point and supply or return air temperatures.

4–3 T-340
 • Provide ability to read and (if applicable) modify the configuration software variables, operating software
Function Codes and Alarm Code indications.
• Provide a Pre-trip step-by-step checkout of refrigeration unit performance including: proper component oper-
ation, electronic and refrigeration control operation, heater operation, probe calibration, pressure limiting and
current limiting settings.
• Provide battery-powered ability to access or change selected codes and set point without AC power con-
nected.
• Provide the ability to reprogram the software through the use of a memory card.
4.2.1 Configuration Software (CnF Variables)
Configuration software is a variable listing of the components available for use by the operational software. This
software is factory installed in accordance with the equipment fitted and options listed on the original purchase
order. Changes to the configuration software are required only when a new controller has been installed or a phys-
ical change has been made to the unit such as the addition or removal of an option. A configuration variable list is
provided in Table 4–4. Change to the factory-installed configuration software is achieved via a configuration card or
by communications.
Figure 4.4 Control Module
1 2 3 4 5 3 6 7 3 8 3

EN12830
CONTROLLER With
(7.5A)

(7.5A)

KB
OC1
(5A)

(5A)

F3A

F3B

KA
MC
MA

MB

CARRIER
KH
TP
F2

F1

Micro-Link3 DataCORDER S/N: 0491162 REV 5147 YYWW:

T B C1 KD
1035 12-00579-00
KC 59980
KE

1) Mounting Screw 5) Fuses

2) Micro-Link 3 Control/DataCORDER Module 6) Control Circuit Power Connection
3) Connectors 7) Software Programming Port
4) Test Points 8) Battery Pack (Standard Location)
-----
4.2.2 Operational Software (Cd Function Codes)
The operational software is the actual operation programming of the controller which activates or deactivates com-
ponents in accordance with current unit operating conditions and selected modes of operation.
The programming is divided into function codes. Some of the codes are read only, while the remaining codes may
be user configured. The value of the user configurable codes can be assigned in accordance with user desired
mode of operation. A list of the function codes is provided in Table 4–5.
To access the function codes:
1. Press the CODE SELECT key, then press an Arrow key until the left window displays the desired function
code.
2. The right window will display the selected function code value for five seconds before returning to normal
display mode.
3. If additional time is required, pressing the ENTER key will extend the display time to 30 seconds.

4.3 Modes of Operation

General operation sequences for cooling, heating and defrost are provided in the following sub-paragraphs. Sche-
matic representation of controller operation is provided in Figure 4.5 and Figure 4.8.

T-340 4–4
Operational software responds to various inputs. These inputs come from the temperature and pressure sensors,
the temperature set point, the settings of the configuration variables and the function code assignments. The action
taken by the operational software changes as the input values change. Overall interaction of the inputs is described
as a “mode” of operation. The modes of operation include perishable (chill) mode and frozen mode. Descriptions of
the controller interaction and modes of operation are provided in the following sub-paragraphs.
4.3.1 Start up - Compressor Phase Sequence
At start up, the controller logic checks for proper phase sequencing and compressor rotation. If incorrect sequenc-
ing is causing the compressor and three-phase evaporator fan motors to rotate in the wrong direction, the controller
will energize or de-energize relay TCP as required. Relay TCP will switch its contacts, energizing or de-energizing
relays PA and PB. Relay PA is wired to energize the circuits on L1, L2 and L3. Relay PB is wired to energize the cir-
cuits on L3, L2, and L1, thus providing reverse rotation.
4.3.2 Start up - Compressor Bump Start
At start up, the controller logic will initiate a compressor bump start procedure to clear liquid refrigerant from the
compressor. If suction and discharge pressures have equalized, the compressor will perform three compressor
bump starts. A compressor bump start may also occur after a defrost cycle has been completed.
During Bump Start, the EEV will close. Relays TS, TQ, TN, TE, and TV will be de-energized (opened). The result of this
action will close the ESV and shut all fans off. The compressor will start for 1 second, then pause for five seconds. This
sequence will be repeated two more times. After the final bump start the unit will pre-position the EEV to the correct
starting position, pause and start up.
4.3.3 Perishable Mode Temperature Control
In Perishable Mode, the controller maintains the supply air temperature at set point, the SUPPLY indicator light is
illuminated and the default reading on the display window is the supply temperature sensor reading.
When the supply air temperature enters the in-range temperature tolerance (Cd30), the green IN-RANGE light will
energize.
When CnF26 (Heat Lockout Temperature) is set to -10°C, perishable mode is active with set points above -10°C
(+14°F). When CnF26 is set to -5°C, perishable mode is active with set points above -5°C (+23°F).
4.3.4 Perishable Pulldown
When the system is in Perishable Pulldown Mode, the highest priority is given to bringing the container down to set
point. When cooling from a temperature that is more than 2.5°C (4.5°F) above set point, the system will be in perish-
able pulldown mode in economized operation.
However, pressure and current limit functions may restrict the valve if either exceeds the preset value.
4.3.5 Perishable Steady State
Perishable Steady State is used to maintain the control temperature near a setpoint that is above the heat lockout
temperature.
Once set point is reached, the unit will transition to perishable steady state mode. This results in unloaded opera-
tion by cycling the DUV to limit capacity and maintain steady temperature control.
The unit is capable of maintaining supply air temperature to within +/-0.2°C (+/-0.36°F) of set point. Supply air tem-
perature is controlled by positioning of the electronic expansion valve (EEV), cycling of the digital unloader valve
(DUV), cycling of the compressor, and cycling of the heaters.
4.3.6 Perishable Idle, Air Circulation
Perishable Idle Mode is used when it is unnecessary to run the compressor to maintain control temperature. If the
controller has determined that cooling is not required or the controller logic determines suction pressure is at the
low pressure limit, the unit will transition to Perishable Idle Mode. During Perishable Idle Mode, the compressor is
turned off, but the evaporator fans continue to run to circulate air throughout the container. If temperature rises
+0.2°C above set point, the unit will transition back to perishable steady state.
4.3.7 Perishable Heating
When it is necessary to raise the control temperature, the system will enter Perishable Heating Mode. If the tem-
perature drops to 0.5°C (0.9°F) below set point, the unit will transition to Perishable Heating Mode, and the heaters
will be energized. The unit will transition back to Perishable Idle Mode when the temperature rises to 0.2°C (0.4°F)
below the set point, and the heaters will de-energize.

4–5 T-340
 Figure 4.5 Controller Operation - Perishable Mode

Perishable Mode Pull Down

(Only Applicable to Perishable Mode)
Controller Set Point ABOVE −10°C (+14 °F),
Controller Set Point ABOVE −10°C (+14 °F),
or−5°C (+23 °F) optionally
or−5°C (+23 °F) optionally

+2.5 °C
(+4.5 °F)
Cooling, Cooling,
Unloaded Economized
+.20 °C
Set
Cooling, Point
−.20 °C Air Circulation −.20 °C Unloaded
−.20 °C −.20 °C
Air Circulation
−.50 °C
−.50 °C

Heating
Heating

Falling Rising
Temperature Temperature

4.3.8 Perishable Dehumidification

Dehumidification is provided to reduce the humidity levels inside the container. Dehumidification is activated when a
humidity value is set at Cd33. The yellow SUPPLY LED will flash ON and OFF every second to indicate that dehumidifi-
cation is active. Once dehumidification is active and the following conditions are satisfied, the controller will activate the
heat relay to begin dehumidification.
• The humidity sensor reading is above the humidity set point (Cd33).
• The unit is in perishable steady state and supply air temperature is less than 0.25°C (0.45°F) above set point.
• The heater debounce timer (three minutes) has timed out.
• Heater termination thermostat (HTT) is closed.
If the above conditions are true for at least one hour the evaporator fans will switch from high speed to low speed.
Evaporator fan speed will then switch every hour, as long as the 4 conditions are met (see Bulb Mode, Section 4.3.9
for different evaporator fan speed options).
If any condition except item (1) becomes false OR if the relative humidity sensed is 2% below the dehumidification
set point, the high speed evaporator fans will be energized.
During dehumidification power is applied to the defrost heaters. This added heat load causes the controller to open
the EEV to match the increased heat load while still holding the supply air temperature very close to the set point.
Opening the EEV reduces the temperature of the evaporator coil surface, which increases the rate at which water
is condensed and removes water from the passing air. Removing water from the air reduces the relative humidity.
When the relative humidity sensed is 2% below set point, the controller de-energizes the heat relay. The controller
will continue to cycle heating to maintain relative humidity below the selected set point. If dehumidification is termi-
nated by a condition other than the humidity sensor, e.g., an out-of-range or compressor shutdown condition, the
heat relay is de-energized immediately.

T-340 4–6
Two timers are activated during dehumidification to prevent rapid cycling and consequent contactor wear:
1. Heater debounce timer (three minutes) - The heater debounce timer is started whenever the heater contac-
tor status is changed. The heat contactor remains energized (or de-energized) for at least three minutes
even if the set point criteria are satisfied.
2. Out-of-range timer (five minutes) - The out-of-range timer is started to maintain heater operation during a
temporary out-of-range condition. If supply air temperature remains outside of the user selected in-range
setting for more than five minutes, the heaters will be de-energized to allow the system to recover. The out-
of-range timer starts as soon as temperature exceeds in-range tolerance value set by Cd30.
4.3.9 Perishable Dehumidification - Bulb Mode
Bulb mode is an extension of dehumidification which allows changes to the evaporator fan speed and/or defrost
termination set points.
Bulb mode is active when Cd35 is set to “Bulb.” Once bulb mode is activated, the user may then change dehumid-
ification evaporator fan operation from the default (speed alternates from low to high each hour) to constant low or
constant high speed. This is done by toggling Cd36 from its default of “alt” to “Lo” or “Hi” as desired. If low speed
evaporator fan operation is selected, this gives the user the additional capability of selecting dehumidification set
points from 60 to 95% (instead of the normal 65 to 95%).
In addition, if bulb mode is active, Cd37 may be set to override the previous defrost termination thermostat (DTT)
settings. The temperature at which the DTT will be considered “open” may be changed [in 0.1°C(0.2°F) incre-
ments] to any value between 25.6°C (78°F) and 4°C (39.2°F). The temperature at which the DTT is considered
closed for interval timer start or demand defrost is 10°C (50°F) for “open” values from 25.6°C (78°F)down to a
10°C(50°F) setting. For “open” values lower than 10°C, the “closed” values will decrease to the same value as the
“open” setting. Bulb mode is terminated when:
• Bulb mode code Cd35 is set to “Nor.”
• Dehumidification code Cd33 is set to “Off.”
• The user changes the set point to one that is in the frozen range.
When bulb mode is disabled by any of the above conditions, evaporator fan operation for dehumidification reverts
to “alt” and the DTS termination setting resets to the value determined by CnF41.
4.3.10 Perishable Economy
Economy fan mode is an extension of the Perishable Mode, and is provided for power saving purposes. Economy
fan mode is activated when Cd34 (also used for Frozen Economy Mode) is set to “ON.” Economy fan mode is used
in the transportation of temperature-tolerant cargo or non-respiration items which do not require high airflow for
removing respiration heat.
There is no active display that indicates that economy fan mode has been initiated. To check for economy fan
mode, perform a manual display of Cd34.
In order to initiate economy fan mode, a perishable set point must be selected prior to activation. When economy
fan mode is active, the evaporator fans will be controlled as follows:
At the start of each cooling or heating cycle, the evaporator fans will run in high speed for three minutes.
They will then be switched to low speed any time the supply air temperature is within +/- 0.2°C (0.36°F) of
the set point and the return air temperature is less than or equal to the supply air temperature +3°C (5.4°F).
The fans will continue to run in low speed for one hour. At the end of the hour, the evaporator fans will
switch back to high speed and the cycle will be repeated. If bulb mode is active, economy fan mode will be
overridden.
4.3.11 Perishable Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation

NOTE
In Standard Perishable Mode, the evaporator motors run in high speed. In Economy Fan Mode, the fan
speed is varied.
a. When supply air temperature is above set point and decreasing, the unit will cool with the condenser fan
motor (CF), compressor motor (CH), and evaporator fan motors (EF) energized, and the white COOL light
illuminated (see Figure 4.6). Also, if current or pressure limiting is not active, the controller will close con-
tacts TS to open the economizer solenoid valve (ESV) and place the unit in economized operation.

4–7 T-340
 Figure 4.6 Perishable Mode Cooling
ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
ST
F 24 VOLT POWER

HPS TC CH

IP-CM TN CF

TV EF ES

IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF

HTT TH HR

TS ESV

b. When supply air temperature decreases to a predetermined tolerance above set point (Cd30), the green IN
RANGE light is illuminated.
c. As air temperature continues to fall, unloaded cooling starts (DUV pulses opens) as the supply air tempera-
ture approaches set point (see Figure 4.5).
d. When unloaded cooling starts, EEV control will transition from a full cool superheat set point to a lower mod-
ulated cool superheat set point. Once unloading starts, the EEV controls evaporator superheat based on the
system duty cycle where instantaneous superheat will vary.
e. When the supply air temperature has fallen to within 1.9°C (3.4°F) of set point temperature and the average
capacity of the system has fallen below 70%, the unit will open contacts TS to close the ESV and take the
unit out of economized operation.
f. The controller continuously monitors supply air temperature. Once the supply air temperature falls below set
point, the controller periodically records supply air temperature, set point and time. A calculation is then per-
formed to determine temperature drift from set point over time. If the calculation determines that cooling is
no longer required, contacts TC and TN are opened to de-energize the compressor motor and the con-
denser fan motor. In addition the controller will close the EEV.
g. The evaporator fan motors continue to run to circulate air throughout the container. The green IN RANGE
light remains illuminated as long as the supply air temperature is within tolerance of the set point.
h. If the supply air temperature increases to 1.0°C (1.8°F) above set point and three minutes have elapsed,
contacts TC and TN close to restart the compressor and condenser fan motors in standard mode (non-
economized) operation. The white COOL light is also illuminated.
i. If the average system capacity has risen to 100% during unloaded cooling and three minutes off time has
elapsed, relay TS will energize to open the ESV, placing the unit in economized mode.
j. If the supply air increases more than 2.5°C (4.5°F) above set point temperature, the microprocessor will
transition the evaporator superheat control from modulation back to full cool control.
4.3.12 Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation
a. If the supply air temperature decreases 0.5°C (0.9°F) below set point, the system enters the heating mode
(see Figure 4.5). The controller closes contacts TH (see Figure 4.7) to allow power flow through the heat
termination thermostat (HTT) to energize the heaters (HR). The orange HEAT light is also illuminated. The
evaporator fans continue to run to circulate air throughout the container.
b. When the supply air temperature rises to 0.2°C (0.4°F) below set point, contact TH opens to de-energize the
heaters. The orange HEAT light is also de-energized. The evaporator fans continue to run to circulate air
throughout the container.

T-340 4–8
 c. The safety heater termination thermostat (HTT) is attached to an evaporator coil circuit and will open the
heating circuit if overheating occurs.

Figure 4.7 Perishable Mode Heating

ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
ST
F 24 VOLT POWER

HPS TC CH

IP-CM TN CF

TV EF ES

IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF

HTT TH HR

TS ESV

NOTE
The EEV and DUV are independently operated by the microprocessor. For full diagrams and legend, see
Section 8.
4.3.13 Perishable Mode - Trim Heat
If the system capacity has been decreased to the lowest allowable capacity and conditions exist that warrant max-
imum temperature stability the controller will pulse the HR relay to energize the evaporator heaters in sequence
with the compressor digital signal.
4.3.14 Frozen Mode - Temperature Control
In Frozen Mode, the controller maintains the return air temperature at set point, the yellow RETURN indicator light is
illuminated, and the default reading on the display window is the return temperature sensor (RTS) reading.
When the return air temperature enters the in-range temperature tolerance (Cd30), the green IN-RANGE light will
energize.
When CnF26 (Heat Lockout Temperature) is set to -10°C, frozen mode is active with set points below -10°C
(+14°F). When CnF26 is set to -5°C, frozen mode is active with set points below -5°C (+23°F).
When the system is in Frozen Mode, the highest priority is given to bringing the container down to set point, the
system will remain in economized operation.
4.3.15 Frozen Steady State
Frozen cargos are not sensitive to minor temperature changes, and the frozen temperature control system takes
advantage of this to greatly improve the energy efficiency of the unit. Frozen range temperature control is accom-
plished by cycling the compressor on and off as the load demand requires.
Once the frozen set point is reached, the unit will transition to frozen steady state (economized operation).
4.3.16 Frozen Idle Mode
When temperature drops to set point minus 0.2°C (0.4°F) and the compressor has run for at least five minutes, the
unit will transition to the frozen idle mode. The compressor is turned off and the evaporator fans continue to run to
circulate air throughout the container. If temperature rises above set point +0.2°C (0.4°F), the unit will transition back
to the frozen steady state mode.

4–9 T-340
 Figure 4.8 Controller Operation - Frozen Mode

Frozen Mode
Controller Set Point at or BELOW −10°C (+14 °F),
or −5°C (+23 °F) optionally

+2.5 °C
(+4.5 °F)

Cooling,
Economized

+.20 °C
Set Point
−.20 °C

Air Circulation

Falling Rising
Temperature Temperature
4.3.17 Frozen “Heat” Mode
If the temperature drops 10°C (18°F) below set point, the unit will transition to the frozen “heating” mode. The evap-
orator fans are brought to high speed, and the heat from the fans is circulated through the container. The unit will
transition back to frozen steady state when the temperature rises back to the transition point.
4.3.18 Frozen Economy Mode
In order to activate Frozen Economy Mode, a frozen set point temperature must be selected, and Cd34 (Economy
Mode) set to “ON.” When economy mode is active, the system will perform normal frozen mode operations except
that the entire refrigeration system, excluding the controller, will be turned off when the control temperature is less
than or equal to the set point -2°C (4°F). After an off-cycle period of 60 minutes, the unit will turn on high speed
evaporator fans for three minutes, and then check the control temperature. If the control temperature is greater
than or equal to the frozen set point +0.2°C (0.4°F), the unit will restart the refrigeration system and continue to
cool until the off-cycle temperature criteria are met. If the control temperature is less than the frozen set point
+0.2°C (0.4°F) the unit will turn off the evaporator fans and restart another 60 minute off-cycle.
4.3.19 Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation
a. When the return air temperature is above set point and decreasing, the unit will transition to economized
cooling with the condenser fan motor (CF), compressor motor (CH), economizer solenoid valve (ESV), low
speed evaporator fan motors (ES) energized and the white COOL light illuminated (see Figure 4.9).

T-340 4–10
 b. When the return air temperature decreases to a predetermined tolerance above set point, the green IN-
RANGE light is illuminated.
c. When the return air temperature decreases to 0.2°C (0.4°F) below set point, contacts TC, TS and TN are
opened to de-energize the compressor, economizer solenoid valve and condenser fan motor. The white
COOL light is also de-energized. The EEV will close.
d. The evaporator fan motors continue to run in low speed to circulate air throughout the container. The green
IN-RANGE light remains illuminated as long as the return air is within tolerance of set point.
e. If return air temperature drops to 10°C (18°F) or more below set point, the evaporator fans increase to high
speed.
f. When the return air temperature increases to 0.2°C (0.4°F) above set point and three minutes have
elapsed, the EEV opens and contacts TC, TS and TN close to restart the compressor, open the ESV and
restart the condenser fan motor. The white COOL is illuminated.

Figure 4.9 Frozen Mode

ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
ST
F 24 VOLT POWER

HPS TC CH

IP-CM TN CF

TV EF ES

IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF

HTT TH HR

TS ESV

NOTE
The EEV and DUV are independently operated by the microprocessor. Complete schematics and legends
are located in Section 8.
4.3.20 Defrost
Defrost is initiated to remove ice buildup from the evaporator coil which can obstruct air flow and reduce the cooling
capacity of the unit. The defrost cycle may consist of up to three distinct operations. The first is de-icing of the coil, the
second is defrost due to a probe check cycle, and the third is a snap freeze.
Defrosting the coil consists of removing power to the cooling components (compressor, evaporator fans, and con-
denser fan), closing the EEV, and turning on the heaters, which are located below the evaporator coil. During nor-
mal operation, de- icing will continue until temperatures indicate that the ice on the coil has been removed, proper
air flow has been restored, and the unit is ready to control temperature efficiently.
After de-icing, and depending on unit configuration, a Defrost / Probe Check and/or Snap Freeze may occur:
During Defrost / Probe Check, the evaporator fans are allowed to run for a period of time after de-icing in
order to validate the accuracy of the temperature sensors, and confirm that defrost was executed properly.
See Section 5.10, Probe Diagnostics for additional information.
Defrost / Snap Freeze allows the system to cool for a period of time after de-icing, with the evaporator fans
turned off. This allows for the removal of latent de-icing heat from the evaporator coils, and freezes any
remaining moisture that might otherwise be blown into the container.

4–11 T-340
4.3.21 Automatic Defrost
In perishable mode, perishable-pull down mode, or frozen mode, automatic defrost starts with an initial defrost set
to three hours and then adjusts the interval to the next defrost based on the accumulation of ice on the evaporator
coil. In this way, defrosts are scheduled to occur only when necessary.
In frozen mode, once the frozen set point has been reached, automatic defrost will set the time interval to 12 hours
for the first two defrosts, and then adjust to 24 hours thereafter.
All defrost interval times reflect the number of compressor run time hours since the last defrost cycle. The minimum
defrost interval in the automatic setting is three hours while the maximum is 24. See Section 4.3.22, Defrost Inter-
vals for more information.
In frozen mode the amount of actual time necessary to accumulate defrost interval time will exceed the defrost
interval time by a factor of two to three depending on the compressor duty-cycle. Defrost interval time is only accu-
mulated when the compressor is running, and the Defrost Termination Sensor (DTS) reads less than 10°C (50°F),
at which point the Defrost Termination Thermostat (DTT) is considered closed.
If defrost does not terminate correctly and temperature reaches the set point of the Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT),
the HTT will open to de-energize the heaters (AL59 & AL60). If the HTT does not open and termination does not occur
within two hours, the controller will terminate defrost. AL60 will be activated to inform of a possible DTS failure.
4.3.22 Defrost Initiation
Initiation of defrost is dependent on the state of the Defrost Temperature Thermostat (DTT). The functionality of the
DTT is controlled by the system software, based on the temperature reading of the Defrost Termination Sensor
(DTS). In the case of a failed DTS, the RTS may be used to determine the state of the DTT.
Defrost cannot be initiated when the DTT is considered OPEN, because an open DTT indicates that the tempera-
ture is too high for ice to build up. Defrost can only occur when the temperature sensed by the DTS is low
enough to CLOSE the DTT.
If the DTT is closed, the unit is in Perishable or Frozen Mode, and the Controlled Atmosphere Vent is closed (if
applicable), then defrost can be initiated when any one of the following additional conditions become true:
1. Manual defrost is initiated by the operator. The Manual Defrost Switch (MDS), located on the front of the
unit, is a momentary toggle switch that must be held closed until defrost is initiated. The MDS is ignored
during Pretrip, and the DTT must be considered CLOSED for MDS activation to work.
Manual defrost can also be initiated by pressing the MANUAL DEFROST/INTERVAL key for greater than 5
seconds, or pressing the PRE TRIP key and the ALT MODE key for greater than 5 seconds. If the two key
method is used the display may show “P” or “Dc” while waiting for defrost to initiate.
2. The Defrost Interval Timer reaches or exceeds the Defrost Interval.
3. During Pretrip, defrost may occur during tests P-8, and P-10. Defrost is forced during Pretrip test P-9.
4. Temperature Probe Diagnostics logic determines that a Probe Check is necessary based on temperature
values currently reported by the supply and return probes.
5. An Initiate Defrost command is sent via communications.
6. The microprocessor can determine if defrost is required by calculating the difference between return air tem-
perature and supply air temperature (Delta T). If the temperature difference between return air and supply
air is too great, it indicates reduced airflow over the evaporator coil, and a defrost cycle may be required:
a. In Perishable Pull Down - Defrost will be initiated if Delta T increases to greater than 12°C, DTT is
closed, and 90 minutes of compressor run time have been recorded.
b. In Frozen Mode - Defrost will be initiated if Delta T increases to greater than 16°C, DTT is closed, and 90
minutes of compressor run time have been recorded.
c. In Perishable Steady State - A baseline Delta T is used to determine when defrost should be activated.
The baseline is recorded after completion of an initial defrost cycle. In order to record a baseline Delta T,
the unit must be cooling, and the evaporator fans and heaters must remain in a stable state for a period
of five minutes. Defrost will then be initiated if Delta T increases to greater than 4°C above the baseline,
the DTT is closed, and 90 minutes of compressor run time have been recorded.

NOTE
During defrost, the Defrost Relay is energized, the orange DEFROST light is illuminated, and the orange
HEAT light is illuminated.

T-340 4–12
Defrost may be initiated any time the defrost temperature sensor reading falls below the controller DTT set point.
Defrost will terminate when the defrost temperature sensor reading rises above the DTT set point. The DTT is not
a physical component. It is a controller setting that acts as a thermostat, “closing” (allowing defrost) when the
defrost temperature sensor reading is below the set point and “opening” (terminating or preventing defrost) when
the sensor temperature reading is above set point. When the unit is operating in bulb mode (see Section 4.3.9),
special settings may be applicable.
If the controller is programmed with the Lower DTT setting option, the defrost termination thermostat set point may
be configured to the default of 25.6°C (78°F) or lowered to 18°C (64°F). When a request for defrost is made
through the manual defrost switch, communications or probe check the unit will enter defrost if the DTT reading is
at or below the DTT setting. Defrost will terminate when the DTS reading rises above the DTT setting. When a
request for defrost is made with the defrost interval timer or by demand defrost, the defrost temperature setting
must be below 10°C (50°F).
When defrost is initiated, the controller closes the EEV, opens contacts TC, TN and TE (or TV) to de-energize the
compressor, condenser fan and evaporator fans. The white COOL light is also de-energized. The controller then
closes contacts TH to supply power to the heaters, and the orange DEFROST light is illuminated. When the DTS
reading rises to the DTT setting, the de-icing operation is terminated.
Figure 4.10 Defrost

ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
ST
F 24 VOLT POWER

HPS TC PB

IP-CM TN CF

TV EF ES

IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF

HTT TH HR

TS ESV

NOTE
The EEV and DUV are independently operated by the microprocessor. Complete schematics and legends
are located in Section 8.
4.3.23 Defrost Interval
There are two modes for defrost initiation, user-selected timed intervals and automatic control.
The user-selected values are (OFF), 3, 6, 9, 12, 24 hours, AUTO, or PuLS; factory default is 3 hours.
Automatic defrost starts with an initial defrost at three hours and then adjusts the interval to the next defrost based
on the accumulation of ice on the evaporator coil. Following a start-up or after termination of defrost, the time will
not begin counting down until the DTS reading falls below set point (DTT closed). If the reading of DTS rises above
set point (DTT open) any time during the timer count down, the interval is reset and the countdown starts over.
4.3.24 Defrost Related Settings
If probe check (CnF31) is configured to SPECIAL, the unit will proceed to the next operation (snap freeze or termi-
nate defrost). If CnF31 is configured to STANDARD, the unit will perform a probe check. The probe check is a test
that compares temperature sensor readings to determine if any sensors have failed.
If probe check fails, the system will run for eight minutes to validate. At the end of eight minutes, probe alarms will be
set or cleared based on the current conditions.
When the return air temperature falls to 7°C (45°F), the controller ensures that the defrost temperature sensor
(DTS) reading has dropped to 10°C or below. If it has not it indicates a failed DTS, a DTS failure alarm is triggered
and the defrost mode is operated by the return temperature sensor (RTS).

4–13 T-340
If controller function code CnF33 is configured to snap freeze, the controller will sequence to this operation. The
snap freeze consists of running the compressor without the evaporator fans in operation for a period of 4 minutes
at 100% capacity. When the snap freeze is completed, defrost is terminated.
If CnF23 is configured to “SAv” (save), then the value of the defrost interval timer will be saved at power down and
restored at power up. This option prevents short power interruptions from resetting an almost expired defrost interval,
and possibly delaying a needed defrost cycle.
CnF11 determines whether the operator will be allowed to chose “OFF” as a defrost interval option.
CnF64 determines whether the operator will be allowed to choose “PuLS” as a defrost interval option. For units
operating with “PuLS” selected, defrost interval is determined by the unit temperature setpoint and the Evaporator
Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting (Cd60). When the unit temperature setpoint is equal to or less than the Evapora-
tor Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting, the defrost interval is set to 6 hours. Otherwise, the defrost interval is deter-
mined using the Automatic Defrost Interval Determination logic. In either case, “PuLS” remains displayed in this
function select code.
After a new Defrost Interval is selected, the previously selected Interval is used until the next defrost termination,
the next time the DTT contacts are OPEN, or the next time power to the control is interrupted. If the previous value
or the new value is “OFF”, the newly selected value will be used immediately.
If any Auto Pretrip sequence is initiated, Cd27 will be set to ‘AUTO’ unless CnF49 (OEM Reset) is set to “Custom”
AND CnF64 (Evaporator Fan Pulsing Logic) configuration variable is set to IN, in which case Cd27 will be set to
“PuLS”.

4.4 Protection Modes of Operation

4.4.1 Evaporator Fan Operation
Opening of an evaporator fan internal protector will shut down the unit.
4.4.2 Failure Action
Function code Cd29 may be operator set to select the action the controller will take upon a system failure. The fac-
tory default is full system shutdown. See Table 4–5, Controller Function Codes.
4.4.3 Generator Protection
Function codes Cd31(Stagger Start, Offset Time) and Cd32 (Current Limit) may be operator set to control the start
up sequence of multiple units and operating current draw. The factory default allows on demand starting (no delay)
of units and normal current draw. See Table 4–5, Controller Function Codes.
4.4.4 Compressor High Temperature, Low Pressure Protection
The controller continuously monitors compressor discharge pressure and temperature, and suction pressure. If
discharge pressure or temperature rises above the allowed limit or suction pressure falls below the allowed limit,
the compressor will be cycled off and on every 3 minutes. Condenser and evaporator fans will continue to operate
during the compressor off cycle.
If high compressor dome temperature occurs, as measured by the CPDS, the controller will allow additional refrig-
erant to be released into the system in order to provide cooling to the evaporator coil and compressor dome. The
controller is alerted to high compressor dome temperatures via the CPDS when ambient temperature is greater
than 43.3°C, return air temperature is less than -17.5°C and the compressor discharge temperature is greater than
117.7°C.
Dome temperature control logic will disengage when return air temperature and ambient temperature return to
allowed limits or when the compressor turns off.
If the suction pressure low limit is triggered, the DUV will energize to raise the suction pressure.
4.4.5 Perishable Mode - System Pressure Regulation
In perishable mode, system pressures may need to be regulated at ambient temperatures of 20°C (68°F) and
below. Once below this ambient temperature, the condenser fan may cycle on and off based on limits imposed for
discharge pressure. For extremely cold ambient temperatures, -18°C (0°F), heater cycling may occur within normal
system operation based on discharge pressure limits.

T-340 4–14
4.4.6 Condenser Fan Override
When CnF17 (Discharge Temperature Sensor) is set to “In” and CnF48 (Condenser Fan Switch Override) is set to
“On”, the condenser fan switch override logic is activated. If condenser cooling water pressure is sufficient to open
the water pressure switch (de-energizing the condenser fan) when water flow or pressure conditions are not main-
taining discharge temperature, the logic will energize the condenser fan as follows:
1. If the DUV is less than 80% open when the controller calls for it to be100% open, the condenser fan is ener-
gized. When the DUV is 100% open, the fan will de-energize.
2. If DPT reading is invalid or out of range (AL65), the condenser fan is energized and will remain energized
until system power is cycled.
3. If the system is running on condenser fan override and the high pressure switch opens, the condenser fan is
energized and will remain energized until the system power is cycled.

4.5 Quest - CCPC

Compressor-Cycle Perishable Cooling (CCPC) is a method of temperature control used during steady-state perish-
able cooling that cycles the compressor on and off according to return air temperature.
To be eligible for steady-state control the unit must first complete a setpoint pulldown phase and a CCPC pulldown
phase:
• During setpoint pulldown supply air temperature is controlled according to the unit’s nominal supply air setpoint.
• During CCPC pulldown the supply air temperature is lowered somewhat relative to the nominal setpoint.
Evaporator fans are forced to operate at high speed.
Steady-state CCPC control maintains the same lowered supply air temperature that was used during CCPC pull-
down. The compressor cycles on and off according to return air high and low limits. Depending on the fan mode of
operation selected, the evaporator fans may be programmed to run at low speed some or all of the time according
to the control logic.

4.6 Controller Alarms

Alarm display is an independent controller software function. If an operating parameter is outside of expected
range or a component does not return the correct signals back to the controller, an alarm is generated. A listing of
the alarms is provided in Table 4–6.
The alarm philosophy balances the protection of the refrigeration unit and that of the refrigerated cargo. The action
taken when an error is detected always considers the survival of the cargo. Rechecks are made to confirm that an
error actually exists.
Some alarms requiring compressor shutdown have time delays before and after to try to keep the compressor on line.
An example is alarm code “LO,” (low main voltage), when a voltage drop of over 25% occurs, an indication is given on
the display, but the unit will continue to run.
When an Alarm Occurs:
• The red alarm light will illuminate for alarm code numbers 15, 17, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, and 27.
• If a detectable problem exists, its alarm code will be alternately displayed with the set point on the left display.
• The user should scroll through the alarm list to determine what alarms exist or have existed. Alarms must be
diagnosed and corrected before the Alarm List can be cleared.
To Display Alarm Codes:
1. While in the Default Display mode, press the ALARM LIST key. This accesses the Alarm List Display Mode,
which displays any alarms archived in the alarm queue.
2. The alarm queue stores up to 16 alarms in the sequence in which they occurred. The user may scroll
through the list by pressing an Arrow key.
3. The left display will show “AL##,” where ## is the alarm number sequentially in the queue.
4. The right display will show the actual alarm code. “AA##” will display for an active alarm, where “##” is the
alarm code. Or “IA##” will display for an inactive alarm. See Table 4–6, Controller Alarm Indications.
5. “END” is displayed to indicate the end of the alarm list if any alarms are active.

4–15 T-340
 6. “CLEAr” is displayed if all alarms are inactive. The alarm queue may then be cleared by pressing ENTER.
The alarm list will clear and “-----” will be displayed.

NOTE
AL26 is active when none of the sensors are responding. Check the connector at the back of the controller;
if it is loose or unplugged, reconnect it, then run a Pre-trip test (P5) to clear AL26.

4.7 Pre-Trip Diagnostics

Pre-trip Diagnostics is an independent controller function that suspends normal refrigeration controller activities
and provides preprogrammed test routines. The test routine can be run in Auto Mode, which automatically per-
forms a pre programmed sequence of tests, or Manual Mode, which allows the operator to select and run any of
the individual tests.

! CAUTION
Pre-trip inspection should not be performed with critical temperature cargoes in the container.

! CAUTION
When the Pre-trip key is pressed economy, dehumidification and bulb mode will be deacti-
vated. At the completion of the Pre-trip test, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode must
be reactivated.

A Pre-trip test may be initiated by use of the keypad or via communication, but when initiated by communication the
controller will execute the entire battery of tests (auto mode).
At the end of a Pre-trip test, the message “P,” “rSLts” (pretest results) will be displayed. Pressing ENTER will allow
the user to see the results for each of the sub-tests. The results will be displayed as “PASS” or “FAIL” for each test
run to completion.
A detailed description of the Pre-trip tests and test codes is provided in Table 4–7. Detailed operating instructions
are provided in Section 5.9.

4.8 DataCORDER
4.8.1 Description
Carrier Transicold “DataCORDER” software is integrated into the controller and serves to eliminate the tempera-
ture recorder and paper chart. DataCORDER functions may be accessed by keypad selections and viewed on the
display module. The unit is also fitted with interrogation connections (see Figure 4.1) which may be used with the
Carrier Transicold DataReader to download data. A personal computer with Carrier Transicold DataLINE software
installed may also be used to download data and configure settings.

The DataCORDER consists of:

• Configuration Software
• Operational Software
• Data Storage Memory
• Real Time Clock (with internal battery backup)
• Six Thermistor Inputs
• Interrogation Connections
• Power Supply (battery pack)

The DataCORDER performs the following functions:

a. Logs data at 15, 30, 60 or 120 minute intervals and stores two years of data (based on one hour interval).
b. Records and displays alarms on the display module.
c. Records results of Pre-trip testing.

T-340 4–16
 d. Records DataCORDER and temperature control software generated data and events as follows:
• Container ID Change
• Software Upgrades
• Alarm Activity
• Battery Low (battery pack)
• Data Retrieval
• Defrost Start and End
• Dehumidification Start and End
• Power Loss (with and without battery pack)
• Power Up (with and without battery pack)
• Remote Probe Temperatures in the Container (USDA Cold treatment and Cargo probe recording)
• Return Air Temperature
• Set Point Change
• Supply Air Temperature
• Real Time Clock Battery (Internal) Replacement
• Real Time Clock Modification
• Trip Start
• ISO Trip Header (When entered via Interrogation program)
• Economy Mode Start and End
• “Auto 1/Auto 2/Auto 3” Pre-trip Start and End
• Bulb Mode Start
• Bulb Mode Changes
• Bulb Mode End
• USDA Trip Comment
• Humidification Start and End
• USDA Probe Calibration
• Fresh Air Vent Position

4.8.2 DataCORDER Software

The DataCORDER Software is subdivided into Operational Software, Configuration Software, and the Data Memory.
a. Operational Software
The Operational Software reads and interprets inputs for use by the Configuration Software. The inputs are labeled
Function Codes. Controller functions (see Table 4–8) which the operator may access to examine the current input
data or stored data. To access these codes, do the following:
1. Press the ALT. MODE and CODE SELECT keys.
2. Press an Arrow key until the left window displays the desired code number. The right window will display the
value of this item for five seconds before returning to the normal display mode.
3. If a longer display time is desired, press the ENTER key to extend the display time to 30 seconds.
b. Configuration Software
The configuration software controls the recording and alarm functions of the DataCORDER. Reprogramming to the
factory-installed configuration is achieved via a configuration card. Changes to the unit DataCORDER configura-
tion may be made using the DataLINE interrogation software. A list of configuration variables is provided in Table
4–2. Descriptions of DataCORDER operation for each variable setting are provided in the following paragraphs.

4–17 T-340
4.8.3 Sensor Configuration (dCF02)
Two modes of operation may be configured, the Standard Mode and the Generic Mode.
a. Standard Mode
In the standard mode, the user may configure the DataCORDER to record data using one of seven standard config-
urations. The seven standard configuration variables, with their descriptions, are listed in Table 4–3.
The inputs of the six thermistors (supply, return, USDA #1, #2, #3 and cargo probe) and the humidity sensor input
will be generated by the DataCORDER (see Figure 4.11).

NOTE
The DataCORDER software uses the supply and return recorder sensors (SRS, RRS). The temperature
control software uses the supply and return temperature sensors (STS, RTS).
b. Generic Mode
The generic recording mode allows user selection of the network data points to be recorded. The user may select
up to a total of eight data points for recording. A list of the data points available for recording follows.Changing the
configuration to generic and selecting which data points to record may be done using the Carrier Transicold Data
Retrieval Program.
1. Control mode
2. Control temperature
3. Frequency
4. Humidity
5. Phase A current
6. Phase B current
7. Phase C current
8. Main voltage
9. Evaporator expansion valve percentage
10. Discrete outputs (Bit mapped - require special handling if used)
11. Discrete inputs (Bit mapped - require special handling if used)
12. Ambient sensor
13. Evaporator temperature sensor
14. Compressor discharge sensor
15. Return temperature sensor (RTS)
16. Supply temperature sensor (STS)
17. Defrost temperature sensor (DTS)
18. Discharge pressure transducer (DPT)
19. Suction pressure transducer (SPT)
20. Condenser pressure transducer
21. Vent position sensor (VPS)
4.8.4 Logging Interval (dCF03)
The user may select four different time intervals between data recordings. Data is logged at exact intervals in
accordance with the real time clock. The clock is factory set at Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
4.8.5 Thermistor Format (dCF04)
The user may configure the format of the recorded thermistor readings. The short resolution is a 1 byte format and the
long resolution is a 2 byte format. The short requires less memory and records temperature with variable resolutions
depending on temperature range. The long records temperature in 0.01°C (0.02°F) steps for the entire range.

T-340 4–18
 Table 4–2 DataCORDER Configuration Variables
Config Title Default Option
dCF01 (Future Use) -- --
dCF02 Sensor Configuration 2 2, 5, 6, 9, 54, 64, 94
dCF03 Logging Interval (Minutes) 60 15, 30, 60, 120
dCF04 Thermistor Format Short Long
dCF05 Thermistor Sampling Type A A, b, C
dCF06 Controlled Atmosphere / Humidity Sampling Type A A, b
dCF07 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 1 A Auto, On, Off
dCF08 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 2 A Auto, On, Off
dCF09 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 3 A Auto, On, Off
dCF10 Alarm Configuration Cargo Sensor A Auto, On, Off

Figure 4.11 Standard Configuration Download Report

Raw Data Report for ABC1234567

May 31, 2007 to Jun 04, 2007
System Configuration at the Time of Interrogation:
Interrogated On May 05, 2007
Extracted by DataLINE Rev 1.0.0

Controller Software: 5327

Controller Serial #: 04163552

Bill of Lading #: 1
Origin: Origin Date:
Destination: Discharge Date:
Comment: DataLINE Tool
Probe Calibration Readings: USDA1: 0.0 USDA2: 0.0 USDA3: 0.0 Cargo: 0.0
Temperature Units: Centigrade
________________________________________________________________________________________
May 31, 2007
Setpoint: 1.66, Container : Serial : 04189552
9 Sensors Logged at 15 Minute Interval
Sensor Format Resolution

4–19 T-340
 Table 4–3 DataCORDER Standard Configurations
Standard Configuration Description
2 sensors (dCF02=2) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
5 sensors (dCF02=5) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
3 USDA thermistor inputs
6 sensors (dCF02=6) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 humidity input
9 sensors (dCF02=9) Not Applicable
6 sensors (dCF02=54) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 cargo probe (thermistor input)
7 sensors (dCF02=64) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 humidity input
1 cargo probe (thermistor input)
10 sensors (dCF02=94) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 humidity input
1 cargo probe (thermistor input)
3 C.A. inputs (NOT APPLICABLE)

4.8.6 Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06)

Three types of data sampling are available: average, snapshot andUSDA.When configured to average, the aver-
age of readings taken every minute over the recording period is recorded. When configured to snapshot, the sen-
sor reading at the log interval time is recorded. When USDA is configured, supply and return temperature readings
are averaged and the three USDA probe readings are snapshot.
4.8.7 Alarm Configuration (dCF07 - dCF10)
USDA and cargo probe alarms may be configured to OFF, ON or AUTO.
If a probe alarm is configured to OFF, the alarm for this probe is always disabled.
If a probe alarm is configured to ON, the associated alarm is always enabled.
If the probes are configured to AUTO, they act as a group. This function is designed to assist users who keep the
DataCORDER configured for USDA recording, but do not install the probes for every trip. If all the probes are dis-
connected, no alarms are activated. As soon as one of the probes is installed, all of the alarms are enabled and the
remaining probes that are not installed will give active alarm indications.
4.8.8 DataCORDER Power Up
The DataCORDER may be powered up in any one of four ways:
1. Normal AC power: The DataCORDER is powered up when the unit is turned on via the Stop-Start switch.
2. Controller DC battery pack power: If a battery pack is installed, the DataCORDER will power up for commu-
nication when an interrogation cable is plugged into an interrogation receptacle.
3. External DC battery pack power: A 12 volt battery pack may also be plugged into the back of the interroga-
tion cable, which is then plugged into an interrogation port. No controller battery pack is required with this
method.
4. Real Time Clock demand: If the DataCORDER is equipped with a charged battery pack and AC power is not
present, the DataCORDER will power up when the real time clock indicates that a data recording should
take place. When the DataCORDER is finished recording, it will power down.
During DataCORDER power-up, while using battery-pack power, the controller will perform a hardware voltage
check on the battery. If the hardware check passes, the controller will energize and perform a software battery volt-
age check before DataCORDER logging. If either test fails, the real time clock battery power-up will be disabled
until the next AC power cycle. Further DataCORDER temperature logging will be prohibited until that time.

T-340 4–20
An alarm will be generated when the battery voltage transitions from good to bad indicating that the battery pack
needs recharging. If the alarm condition persists for more than 24 hours on continuous AC power, it indicates that
the battery pack needs replacement.
4.8.9 Pre-trip Data Recording
The DataCORDER will record the initiation of a Pre-trip test (see Section 4.7) and the results of each test included
in Pre-trip. The data is time-stamped and may be extracted via the Data Retrieval program. See Table 4–9 for a
description of the data stored in the DataCORDER for each corresponding Pre-trip test.
4.8.10 DataCORDER Communications
Data retrieval from the DataCORDER can be accomplished by using the DataReader, DataLINE, DataBANK Card,
or a communications interface module.

NOTE
A DataReader, DataLINE, or a communications interface module display of Communication Failed is
caused by faulty data transfer between the DataCORDER and the data retrieval device. Common causes
include:

1. Bad cable or connection between DataCORDER and data retrieval device.

2. PC communication port(s) unavailable or mis-assigned.

3. Chart Recorder Fuse (FCR) blown.

Configuration identification for the models covered herein may be obtained on the Container Products Group Infor-
mation Center by authorized Carrier Transicold Service Centers.
a. DataReader
The Carrier Transicold Data Reader (see Figure 4.12) is a simple to operate hand-held device designed to extract
data from the DataCORDER and upload it to a PC. The DataReader has the ability to store multiple data files.
Refer to Data Retrieval manual 62-10629 for a more detailed explanation of the DataReader.

Figure 4.12 DataReader

DataReader

1 2
3

4
7
6 5

1) OFF 5) ENTER
2) ON 6) Escape
3) UP Arrow 7) DOWN Arrow
4) RIGHT Arrow 8) LEFT Arrow
-----

4–21 T-340
b. DataBANK™ Card
The DataBANK™ card is a PCMCIA card that interfaces with the controller through the programming slot and can
download the data at a much faster rate, when compared to the PC or DataReader. Files downloaded to Data-
BANK card files are accessible through an Omni PC Card Drive. The files can then be viewed using the DataLINE
software.
c. DataLINE
The DataLINE software for a personal computer is supplied on both floppy disks and CD. This software allows
interrogation, configuration variable assignment, screen view of the data, hard copy report generation, cold treat-
ment probe calibration and file management. Refer to Data Retrieval manual 62-10629 for a more detailed expla-
nation of the DataLINE interrogation software. The DataLINE manual may be found on the Internet at
www.container.carrier.com.
d. Communications Interface Module
The communications interface module is a slave module, which allows communication with a master central monitor-
ing station. The module will respond to communication and return information over the main power line. With a com-
munications interface module installed, all functions and selectable features that are accessible at the unit may be
performed at the master station. Retrieval of all DataCORDER reports may also be performed. Refer to the master
system technical manual for further information.
4.8.11 USDA Cold Treatment
Sustained cold temperature has been employed as an effective post-harvest method for the control of Mediterra-
nean and certain other tropical fruit flies. Exposing infested fruit to temperatures of 2.2°C (36°F) or below for spe-
cific periods results in the mortality of the various stages of this group of insects.
In response to the demand to replace fumigation with this environmentally sound process, Carrier has integrated
Cold Treatment capability into its microprocessor system. These units have the ability to maintain supply air tem-
perature within one quarter degree Celsius of set point and record minute changes in product temperature within
the DataCORDER memory, thus meeting USDA criteria. Information on USDA is provided in the following sub-
paragraphs.
a. USDA Recording
A special type of recording is used for USDA cold treatment purposes.Cold treatment recording requires three
remote temperature probes be placed at prescribed locations in the cargo. Provision is made to connect these
probes to the DataCORDER via receptacles located at the rear left-hand side of the unit. Four or five receptacles
are provided. The four 3-pin receptacles are for the probes. The 5-pin receptacle is the rear connection for the
Interrogator. The probe receptacles are sized to accept plugs with tricam coupling locking devices. A label on the
back panel of the unit shows which receptacle is used for each probe.
The standard DataCORDER report displays the supply and return air temperatures. The cold treatment report dis-
plays USDA #1, #2, #3 and the supply and return air temperatures. Cold treatment recording is backed up by a bat-
tery so recording can continue if AC power is lost.
b. USDA/ Message Trip Comment
A special feature in DataLINE allows the user to enter a USDA (or other) message in the header of a data report.
The maximum message length is 78 characters. Only one message will be recorded per day.
4.8.12 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure
The following is a summary of the steps required to initiate a USDA Cold Treatment:
1. Calibrate the three USDA probes by ice bathing the probes and performing the calibration function with the
DataLINE. This calibration procedure determines the probe offsets and stores them in the controller for use
in generating the cold treatment report. Refer to the Data Retrieval manual 62-10629 for more details.
2. Pre-cool the container to the treatment temperature or below.
3. Install the DataCORDER module battery pack (if not already installed).

T-340 4–22
 4. Place the three probes. The probes are placed into the pulp of the product (at the locations defined in the
following table) as the product is loaded.
Sensor 1 Place in pulp of the product located next to the return air intake.
Place in pulp of the product five feet from the end of the load for 40 foot con-
Sensor 2 tainers, or three feet from the end of the load for 20 foot containers. This probe
should be placed in a center carton at one-half the height of the load.
Place in pulp of product five feet from the end of the load for 40 foot containers
Sensor 3 or three feet from the end of the load for 20 foot containers. This probe should
be placed in a carton at a side wall at one-half the height of the load.

5. To initiate USDA recording, connect the personal computer and perform the configuration as follows, using
the DataLINE software:
a. Enter ISO header information.
b. Enter a trip comment if desired.
c. Configure the DataCORDER for five probes (s, r, P1, P2, P3) (dcf02=5).
d. Configure the logging interval for one hour.
e. Set the sensor configuration to “USDA.”
f. Configure for two byte memory storage format (dcf04=LONG).
g. Perform a “trip start.”
4.8.13 DataCORDER Alarms
The alarm display is an independent DataCORDER function. If an operating parameter is outside of the expected
range or a component does not return the correct values to the DataCORDER, an alarm is generated. The Data-
CORDER contains a buffer of up to eight alarms. A listing of the DataCORDER alarms is provided in Table 4–10.
See Section 4.8.7 for configuration information.
Displaying Alarm Codes:
1. While in the Default Display mode, press the ALT. MODE & ALARM LIST keys. This accesses the Data-
CORDER Alarm List Display Mode, which displays any alarms stored in the alarm queue.
2. To scroll to the end of the alarm list, press the Up Arrow key. Pressing the Down Arrow key will scroll the list
backward.
3. The left display will show “AL#” where # is the alarms number in the queue. The right display will show
“AA##,” if the alarm is active, where ## is the alarm number. “IA##,” will show if the alarm is inactive.
4. “END” is displayed to indicate the end of the alarm list if any alarms are active. “CLEAr” is displayed if all the
alarms in the list are inactive.
5. If no alarms are active, the alarm queue may be cleared. The exception to this rule is the DataCORDER
alarm queue Full alarm (AL91), which does not have to be inactive in order to clear the alarm list. To clear
the alarm list:
a. Press the ALT. MODE & ALARM LIST keys.
b. Press the Up or Down Arrow keys until “CLEAr” is displayed.
c. Press the ENTER key. The alarm list will clear and “-----” will be displayed.
d. Press the ALARM LIST key. “AL” will show on the left display and “-----” on the right display when there
are no alarms in the list.
e. Upon clearing of the alarm queue, the alarm light will be turned off.

4–23 T-340
4.8.14 ISO Trip Header
DataLINE provides the user with an interface to view/ modify current settings of the ISO trip header through the
ISO Trip Header screen.
The ISO Trip Header screen is displayed when the user clicks on the “ISO Trip Header” button in the “Trip Func-
tions” Group Box on the System Tools screen.
F9 function - Provides the user with a shortcut for manually triggering the refresh operation. Before sending modi-
fied parameter values, the user must ensure that a successful connection is established with the controller.
If the connection is established with the DataCORDER, the current contents of the ISO Trip Header from the Data-
CORDER will be displayed in each field. If the connection is not established with the DataCORDER, all fields on
the screen will be displayed as “Xs.” If at any time during the display of the ISO Trip Header screen the connection
is not established or is lost, the user is alerted to the status of the connection.
After modifying the values and ensuring a successful connection has been made with the DataCORDER, click on the
“Send” button to send the modified parameter values.
The maximum allowed length of the ISO Trip Header is 128 characters. If the user tries to refresh the screen or
close the utility without sending the changes made on the screen to the DataCORDER, the user is alerted with a
message.

4.9 Controller Configuration Variables

Table 4–4 Controller Configuration Variables
Config Title Default Option
CnF02 Evaporator Fan Speed dS (Dual) SS (Single)
CnF03 Control Temperature Sensors FOUr duAL
CnF04 Enable Dehumidification On OFF
CnF08 Evaporator Motor Type 1Ph 3Ph
CnF09 Refrigerant Type r134a r744
CnF11 Defrost “Off” Selection noOFF OFF
CnF15 Enable Discharge Temperature Sensor Out In
CnF16 Enable DataCORDER On (Yes) (Not Allowed)
CnF17 Enable Discharge Pressure Sensor Out (No) In (Yes)
CnF18 Heater Type Old (Low Watt) nEW (High Watt)
CnF20 Enable Suction Pressure Sensor Out (No) In (Yes)
CnF22 Economy Mode OFF Std, Full
CnF23 Enable Defrost Interval Save noSAv SAv
CnF24 Enable Long Pre-trip Test Series Auto Auto2, Auto 3
CnF25 Enable Pre-trip Data Recording rSLtS dAtA
CnF26 Heat Lockout Temperature Set to -10C Set to -5C
CnF27 Enable Suction Temperature Sensor Out In
CnF28 Enable Bulb Mode NOr bULb
CnF31 Probe Check SPEC Std
CnF32 Enable Single Evaporator Fan Option 2EF0 (Not Allowed)
CnF33 Enable Snap Freeze OFF SnAP
CnF34 Temperature Unit Display nOth F
CnF37 Electronic Chart Probe rEtUR SUPPL, bOth
CnF41 Enable Low DTT Setting Out In
CnF44 Autoslide Enable Out LO, UP

T-340 4–24
 Table 4–4 Controller Configuration Variables
Config Title Default Option
CnF45 Low Humidity Enabled Out In
CnF46 Quench/liquid Injection Valve Type nO=0=no nC=1=nc
CnF47 Vent Position OFF UP, LOW, CUStOM
CnF49 OEM Reset Option OFF 0-off,1-std, 2-spec, 3-cust
CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Interface 0 0-out, 1-in
CnF51 Timed Defrost Disable 0 0-out, 1-in
CnF52 Oil Return Algorithm 0 0-out, 1-in
CnF53 Water Cool Oil Return Logic 0 0-out, 1-in
CnF55 TXV Boost Relay 0 0-out, 1-in
CnF56 TXV Boost Circuit 0 0-out, 1-in
CnF57 PWM Compressor Control 0 0-out, 1-in
CnF59 Electronic Evaporator Expansion Valve 0 0-out, 1-EC, 2-KE, 3-NA
CnF61 ACT ASC Control Enable 0 0-out, 1-in
CnF62 Extended Temperature Control Enable 0 0-out, 1-in
CnF63 CCPC Pre-trip/Tripstart Default State 0 0-on, 1-off
CnF64 Enable Fan Pulsing Logic 0 0-in, 1-out
CnF66 High Speed Evaporator Fan Option 0 0-off, 1-on
CnF67 Air Heaters 0 0-out, 1-in

NOTE
Configuration numbers not listed are not used in this application. These items may appear when loading
configuration software to the controller but changes will not be recognized by the controller programming.

4.10 Controller Function Codes

Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code Title Description
Note: If the function is not applicable, the display will read “-----”
Display Only Functions - Cd01 through Cd26 are display only functions.
Cd01 Digital Unloader Displays the DUV percent closed. The right display reads 100% when the valve
Valve Closed (%) is fully closed. The valve will usually be at 10% on start up of the unit except in
very high ambient temperatures.
Cd03 Compressor Motor The current sensor measures current draw in lines L1 & L2 by all of the high volt-
Current age components. It also measures current draw in compressor motor leg T3. The
compressor leg T3 current is displayed.
Cd04 Line Current, The current sensor measures current on two legs. The third unmeasured leg is
Phase A calculated based on a current algorithm. The current measured is used for con-
trol and diagnostic purposes. For control processing, the highest of the Phase A
Cd05 Line Current, and B current values is used for current limiting purposes. For diagnostic pro-
Phase B cessing, the current draws are used to monitor component energization.When-
ever a heater or a motor is turned ON or OFF, the current draw increase/
Cd06 Line Current, reduction for that activity is measured. The current draw is then tested to deter-
Phase C mine if it falls within the expected range of values for the component. Failure of
this test will result in a Pre-trip failure or a control alarm indication.
Cd07 Main Power Voltage The main supply voltage is displayed.

4–25 T-340
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code Title Description
Cd08 Main Power The value of the main power frequency is displayed in Hertz. The frequency dis-
Frequency played will be halved if either fuse F1 or F2 is bad (alarm code AL21).
Cd09 Ambient Temperature The ambient sensor reading is displayed.
Cd10 Evaporator Evaporator temperature sensor reading is shown on the right display.
Temperature Sensor
Cd11 Compress or Compressor discharge temperature sensor reading, using compressor dome
Discharge temperature, is displayed.
Temperature
Cd12 Compressor Suction Reading for evaporator pressure transducer (EPT) is shown on the left display;
Pressure Press the ENTER key at Cd12 to show reading for compressor suction port pres-
sure on right display.
Cd14 Compressor Discharge Compressor discharges pressure transducer reading is displayed.
Pressure
Cd15 Digital Unloader Valve The status of the valve is displayed (Open - Closed).
Cd16 Compressor Motor This code displays the compressor motor hours. User can view unit run time by
Hour Meter / Unit Run pressing the ENTER key while in Cd16. Total hours are recorded in increments
Time Hour Meter of 10 hours (i.e., 3000 hours is displayed as 300).
The Compressor Motor Hour Meter display can be reset to 0 by pressing and
holding the ENTER key for 5 seconds. The Unit Run Time Hour Meter cannot be
reset.
Cd17 Relative Humidity % Humidity sensor reading is displayed. This code displays the relative humidity,
as a percent value.
Cd18 Software Revision # The software revision number is displayed.
Cd19 Battery Check This code checks the Controller / DataCORDER battery pack. While the test is
running, “btest” will flash on the right display, followed by the result. “PASS” will
be displayed for battery voltages greater than 7.0 volts. “FAIL” will be displayed
for battery voltages between 4.5 and 7.0 volts, and “-----” will be displayed for
battery voltages less than 4.5 volts. After the result is displayed for four seconds,
“btest” will again be displayed, and the user may continue to scroll through the
various codes.
Cd20 Config / Model # This code indicates the dash number of the model for which the Controller is con-
figured (i.e., if the unit is a 69NT40-551-100, the display will show “51100”). To
display controller configuration database information, press the ENTER key. Val-
ues in “CFYYMMDD” format are displayed if the controller was configured with
a configuration card or with a valid OEM serial port configuration update; YYM-
MDD represents the publication date of the model configuration database.
Cd21 Capacity Mode The mode of operation is displayed (Unloaded - Standard - Economized).
Cd22 Compressor State The status of the compressor is displayed (OFF, On).
Cd23 Evaporator Fan Displays the current evaporator fan state (OFF, LOW, HIGH).
Cd25 Compressor Run Time This code displays the time remaining until the unit goes into defrost (in tenths of
Remaining Until an hour). This value is based on the actual accumulated compressor running
Defrost time.W
Cd26 Defrost Temperature Defrost temperature sensor reading is displayed.
Sensor Reading

T-340 4–26
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code Title Description
Configurable Functions - Cd27 through Cd37 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value
of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd27 Defrost Interval This is the desired period of time between defrost cycles. Factory default is “AU-
(Hours or Automatic) TO”. Refer to Section 4.3.23 for information on Defrost Interval.
CnF11 determines whether the operator will be allowed to chose “OFF” as a de-
frost interval option.
CnF64 determines whether the operator will be allowed to choose “PuLS” as a
defrost interval option. For units operating with “PuLS” selected, defrost interval
is determined by the unit temperature setpoint and the Evaporator Fan Pulsing
Temperature Setting (Cd60). When the unit temperature setpoint is equal to or
less than the Evaporator Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting, the defrost interval
is set to 6 hours. Otherwise, the defrost interval is determined using the Automat-
ic Defrost Interval Determination logic. In either case, “PuLS” remains displayed
in this function select code.
After a new Defrost Interval is selected, the previously selected Interval is used
until the next defrost termination, the next time the DTT contacts are OPEN, or
the next time power to the control is interrupted. If the previous value or the new
value is “OFF”, the newly selected value will be used immediately.
If any Auto Pretrip sequence is initiated, Cd27 will be set to ‘AUTO’ unless
CnF49 (OEM Reset) is set to “Custom” AND CnF64 (Evaporator Fan Pulsing
Logic) configuration variable is set to IN, in which case Cd27 will be set to
“PuLS”.
Cd28 Temperature Units This code determines the temperature units (C or F) that will be used for all tem-
(Degrees C or perature displays. The user selects C or F by selecting function code Cd28 and
Degrees F) pressing the ENTER key. The factory default value is Celsius units. This function
code will display “-----” if CnF34 is set to F.
Cd29 Failure Action (Mode) If all of the control sensors are out of range (alarm code AL26) or there is a probe
circuit calibration failure (alarm code AL27), the unit will enter the shutdown state
defined by this setting. The user selects one of four possible actions as follows:
A - Full Cooling (Compressor is on, economized operation.)
b - Partial Cooling (Compressor is on, standard operation.)
C - Evaporator Fan Only (Evaporator fans on high speed, not applicable with fro-
zen set points.)
d - Full System Shutdown - Factory Default (Shut down every component in the
unit.)
Cd30 In-Range Tolerance The in-range tolerance will determine the temperature band around the set point
which will be designated as in-range.
For normal temperature control, control temperature is considered in range if it
is within setpoint in-range Tolerance. There are four possible values:
1 = +/- 0.5°C (+/-0.9°F)
2 = +/- 1.0°C (+/-1.8°F)
3 = +/- 1.5°C (+/-2.7°F)
4 = +/- 2.0°C (+/-3.6°F) - Factory Default
If the control temperature is in-range, the green IN-RANGE light will be illuminated.
In-range tolerance shall be set to +/- 2.0?C upon activation of dehumidification
or bulb mode (Cd33, Cd35, Cd48).
When CCPC is actively controlling, in-range tolerance is not considered.
“-----” will be displayed whenever Dehumidification or Bulb mode is enabled or
when CCPC with six hour re-activation is actively controlling.
“-----” will be displayed whenever Frozen Economy Mode is operating.

4–27 T-340
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code Title Description
Cd31 Stagger Start Offset The stagger start offset time is the amount of time that the unit will delay at start-
Time (Seconds) up, thus allowing multiple units to stagger their control initiation when all units are
powered up together. The eight possible offset values are 0 (Factory Default), 3,
6, 9, 12, 15, 18 or 21 seconds.
Cd32 Current Limit The current limit is the maximum current draw allowed on any phase at any time.
(Amperes) Limiting the unit’s current reduces the load on the main power supply. When de-
sirable, the limit can be lowered. Note, however, that capacity is also reduced.
The five values for 460 VAC operation are: 15, 17, 19, 21, or 23 amperes. The
factory default setting is 21 amperes.
Cd33 Humidity Setpoint This is the value in percent to which the system will dehumidify or humidify.
There are configuration variables that determine whether dehumidification/hu-
midification capabilities are installed. In the test mode, the setpoint will be tem-
porarily set to 1%, allowing the test of dehumidification. After 5minutes, the
normal setpoint is restored. If unit is configured for HUMIDIFICATION MODE
then selection of a setpoint greater than 75% will activate humidification, and a
setpoint less than or equal to 75% will activate dehumidification. If the unit is con-
figured for dehumidification only, then the entire setpoint range will apply to de-
humidification. If Pretrip is initiated, this value will be set to “OFF” automatically.
(Replaced by Cd48 interface if CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Interface is active.)
Cd34 Economy Mode (On- The current state of the economy mode option, “-----”, On, or Off. CnF22 deter-
Off) mines whether economy mode offered. Economy mode is a user selectable
mode of operation provided for power saving purposes.
Cd35 Bulb Mode The current state of the bulb mode option, “-----”, nOr, or bULb.
(Replaced by Cd48 if CnF50, Enhanced Bulb Mode, is active.)
Bulb mode is an extension of dehumidification control (Cd33). If dehumidification
(CnF04) is set to “Off,” Cd35 will display “Nor” and the user will be unable to
change it. CnF28 determines whether the bulb mode selection is offered.
After a dehumidification set point has been selected and entered for code Cd33,
the user may then change Cd35 to “bulb.” After Bulb Mode has been selected
and entered, the user may then utilize function codes Cd36 and Cd37 to make
the desired changes.
Cd36 Evaporator Fan This is the desired evaporator fan speed for use during the bulb Dehumidification
Speed Select and Humidification mode option.
(Replaced by Cd48 if CnF50, Enhanced Bulb Mode, is active.)
This code is enabled only if in the dehumidification mode (Cd33) and bulb mode
(Cd35) has been set to “bulb.” If these conditions are not met, “alt” will be dis-
played (indicating that the evaporator fans will alternate their speed) and the dis-
play cannot be changed.
If a dehumidification set point has been selected along with bulb mode then “alt”
may be selected for alternating speed, “Lo” for low speed evaporator fan only, or
“Hi” for high speed evaporator fan only.
If a setting other than “alt” has been selected and bulb mode is deactivated in
any manner, then selection reverts back to “alt.”
Cd37 Variable DTT Setting This is the variable defrost termination thermostat setting to be used with the op-
(Bulb Mode) tional bulb mode functionality. This item is only displayed if the bulb mode option
is configured on.
(Replaced by Cd48 interface if CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Interface is active.)

T-340 4–28
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code Title Description
Display Only Functions - Cd38 through Cd40 are display only functions.
Cd38 Secondary Supply Cd38 will display the current supply recorder sensor (SRS) reading for units con-
Temperature Sensor figured for four probes. If the unit is configured with a DataCORDER, Cd38 will
display “-----.” If the DataCORDER suffers a failure, (AL55) Cd38 will display the
supply recorder sensor reading.
Cd39 Secondary Return Cd39 will display the current return recorder sensor (RRS) reading for units config-
Temperature Sensor ured for four probes. If the unit is configured with a DataCORDER, Cd39 will display
“-----.” If the DataCORDER suffers a failure, (AL55) Cd39 will display the return re-
corder sensor reading.
Cd40 Container If a valid container id exists, the default display for Cd40 will be “cd40_XXXXX”
Identification where “XXXXX” is the 5th character through the 9th character of the container id.
Number Pressing the ENTER key on Cd40 will display “id_YYYYYYY” where “YYYYYYY”
is the 5th character to the 11th character of the container id.
If no valid container id exists or the container id is blank, the default display will have
Cd40 on the left display and the right display will alternate between “_nEEd” and
“___id”. Pressing the ENTER key while on Cd40 in the state will prompt the Set Id
Interface.
On start up if the container id is not valid, Cd40 will be brought up on the display for
the first minute of power up. This can be left by either entering a container id or leav-
ing the code select normally.
Cd40 is configured at commissioning to read a valid container identification num-
ber. The reading will not display alpha characters; only the numeric portion of the
number will display.
Cd41 Valve Override SERVICE FUNCTION: This code is used for troubleshooting, and allows manual
positioning of the economizer solenoid valve, electronic expansion valve, and
digital unloader valve. Provides readings such as: Percent Capacity, EEV, Ca-
pacity Mode, LIV and DUV. Refer to Section 7.21 for operating instructions.
Configurable Functions - Cd43 is a user-selectable function. The operator can change the value of this function
to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd43 eAutoFresh Mode Cd43 is a user selectable mode of operation that allows the opening and closing
of a mechanical air vent door via a stepper motor. These selection modes are as
follows:
OFF - Air makeup vent will remain closed.
USER - Allows for manual selection of the setting.
DELAY - The opening of the door is based on selected time, return temperature
and flow rate (percent opened).
gASLM - The opening is based percent open and CO2 and O2 selectable limits
(LM). This selection is only active if the unit has a CO2 sensor.
TEST / CAL (CO2 sensor option units only) - The door will fully open and close
to allow the user to inspect its operation. If CAL is selected, the controller will
zero calibrate the CO2 sensor input.
If the unit is not configured with AutoFresh, the Cd43 will display “----”
Refer to Section 5.4.3 for description of operational parameters.

4–29 T-340
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code Title Description
Display Only Function - Cd44 is a display only function.
Cd44 eAutoFresh Values / Code Cd44 displays the eAutoFresh CO2 and O2 values (CO2 and O2) and CO2
CO2 Sensor Status and O2 limits (CO2 LIM and O2 LIM), respectively.
This function code will be dashed out if not configured for eAutofresh.
This function code will be dashed if CO2 sensor is not detected, and a sensor is
not expected (didn’t have one previously).
This function code will display “ChECK” if a CO2 sensor has not been auto-de-
tected at the most recent power-up and was detected at a previous power-up. If
“ChECK” is displayed and the ENTER key is pressed, “SEnSr” is displayed with
the choices of “YES” and “no”:
“YES” - sensor should be remembered as detected (present)
“no” - sensor should not be remembered as being detected (not present)
Configurable Functions - Cd45 through Cd48 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value
of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd45 Vent Position Sensor Values: 0 to 240 for UPPER / 0 to 225 for LOWER
(VPS) Position This function code will be dashed out if not configured for VPS.
When configured for VPS, Cd45 displays the current vent position in units of 5
CMH (units displayed as “CM”) or CFM (units displayed as “CF”) depending on
the selection of Cd46 (Airflow display units), Cd28 (Metric/Imperial) or the press-
ing of the deg C/F key.
Cd45 will display whenever the control detects movement via the sensor unless
AL50 is active. Cd45 will display for 30 seconds, then time out and return to the
normal display mode.
Cd46 Airflow Display Units Selects the airflow units to be displayed by Cd45 if configured for Vent Position
Sensor or displayed by “USER/FLO” under Cd43 if configured for Autoslide.
CF = Cubic Feet per Minute
CM = Cubic Meters per Hour
bOth = Displays CF or CM depending on the setting of Cd28 (Metric/Imperial) or
the pressing of the degree C/F key.
Cd47 Variable Economy The variable temperature “degrees C or degrees F” setting is used with economy
Temperature Setting mode. Function code is “----” when unit is not configured for economy mode.

T-340 4–30
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code Title Description
Cd48 Dehumidification / Initially Cd48 will display current dehumidification-mode; bUlb - bulb cargo
Bulb Cargo Mode mode, dEhUM - normal dehumidification, or OFF - off. This display is steady.
Parameter Selection Pressing the ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of param-
eter selection menus (mode, setpoint, evaporator speed, DTT setting). Pressing
the ENTER key in any parameter selection menu commits to selection of the cur-
rently displayed parameter and causes the interface to descend into the next pa-
rameter selection menu. All parameter selection menus alternate between a
blank display and the current selection in the right hand display.
Pressing the CODE SELECT key in a selection menu cancels the current selec-
tion activity and ascends back up to the next higher selection menu (or to Cd48
display mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds the interface reverts to
normal system display and the current selection menu is cancelled, but any pre-
viously committed changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configuration op-
tions and previously selected parameters as indicated above.
Whenever any pretrip test is initiated, dehumidification-mode goes to OFF.
Whenever dehumidification-mode goes to OFF:
• Dehumidification control setpoint goes to 0% RH internally but will then
initialize to 95% RH when dehumidification-mode leaves OFF.
• Evaporator speed select goes to Alt for units without PWM Compressor
Control (Cnf57 = Out), Evaporator speed select goes to Hi for units with
PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = In).
• DTT setting goes to 25.6°C or 18.0°C, depending on Cnf41.
Whenever dehumidification-mode is set to bUlb, DTT setting goes to 18.0°C if it
had been set higher.
Whenever dehumidification-mode is set to dEhUM, DTT setting goes to 25.6°C
or 18.0°C, depending on Cnf41.
For units without PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = Out):
• Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set below 65% RH evapo-
rator speed select goes to LO if it had been set to Hi.
• Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set above 64% RH evapo-
rator speed select goes to Alt if it had been set to LO.
For units with PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = In):
• Whenever dehumidification control set point is set below 60% RH, the
evaporator fan speed is set to LO, the user has the ability to set the evap-
orator fan speed to Hi via the keypad.
• Whenever dehumidification control set point is set equal to or above 60%
RH, the evaporator fan speed is set to Hi, the user has the ability to set
the evaporator fan speed to LO via the keypad.
Display Only Function - Cd49 is a display only function.
Cd49 Days Since Last Displays the number of days since last successful pretrip sequence.
Successful Pre-trip Press the ENTER key to view the number of days since the last successful pre-
trip for Auto1, Auto2, and Auto2 in sequence.
Press the CODE SELECT key to step back through the list and ultimately to exit
the Cd49 display.

4–31 T-340
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code Title Description
Configurable Functions - Cd50 through Cd53 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value
of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd50 CCPC Disabled ”OFF” = disabled.
”On” = enabled.
”SEtPt” = suspended by setpoint too low.
”CAHUM” = suspended by CA or humidity control.
”ACt” = suspended by ACT active.
”FAIL” = all return temperature probe failure for CCPC.
”PrtrP” = pretrip active.
”C LIM” = suspended by cool limit logic.
”PULL” = pulldown active.
“ALArM ” = suspended by shutdown alarm
Press the ENTER key, Arrow keys, and then ENTER to select “OFF” or “On”.
If “On” is selected, CCPC operation may be suspended as indicated by one of
the suspension codes listed above. If CCPC is not “OFF” and is not suspended,
“On” will be displayed.
Cd51 Automatic Cold ACT-mode:
Treatment Cd51 increments of (1 day)_(1hr), Display: default “0_0 “
Parameter Selection
“done” mm-dd this will be display is ACT has completed
“ACt” value “On” “OFF” or “----“Display /Select: default “OFF“
“trEAt” value °C / °F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default “0.0°C“
“DAyS” value “0 - 99” increments of 1 Display/Select: default “0”
“ProbE” value Probe positions ex ’1 2 _ 4’ ’1 _ 3 _’ Display: default “---- “
“SPnEW” value °C / °F on 0.1° increments Display/Select: default “10.0°C “
Initially Cd51 will display current countdown timer increments of (1 day)_(1hr),
default “0_0
Pressing the ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of param-
eter selection menus (act, treat, days, probe and spnew setting).
Pressing the ENTER key in any of the parameter selection menus commits to
selection of the currently displayed parameter and causes the interface to de-
scend into the next parameter selection menu. All parameter selection menus al-
ternate between a blank display and the current selection in the right hand
display.
Pressing the CODE SELECT key in a selection menu cancels the current selec-
tion activity and ascends back up to the next higher selection menu (or to Cd51
display mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds the interface reverts to
normal system display and the current selection menu is cancelled, but any pre-
viously committed changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configuration op-
tions and previously selected parameters as indicated above.
Parameter with the exception of “Act” may not be altered if Cd51 is re-entered if
“Act” is “On”. When ACT has completed including reaching the new setpoint “do-
ne” on the left display and the MONTH DAY of completion on the right display
will be displayed as the second entry in the menu. Turning ACT off clears this
entry. This action also resets Cd51 to initial time remaining. ACT must then be
turned on to view or modify the additional parameters.
Whenever any auto Pre-trip test or Trip Start is initiated, ACT mode goes to OFF.

T-340 4–32
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code Title Description
Cd53 Automatic Set point ASC-mode:
Change Mode Cd53 increments of (1 day)_(1hr), Display: default “0_0 “
Parameter Selection
“done” mm-dd this will be display is ASC has completed
“ASC” value “On” “OFF” Display /Select: default “OFF“
“nSC” value “1 - 6” (This is the value “n” for the subsequent entries).
“SP (n-1)” value °C / °F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default
“10.0°C“
“DAY (n-1)” value “1 - 99” increments of 1 Display/Select: default “1“
“SP (n)” value °C / °F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default “10.0°C
Initially Cd53 will display current count down timer increments of (1 day)_(1hr),
default “0_0
Pressing the ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of param-
eter selection menus, (mode, act, treat, days, probe and spnew setting). Press-
ing the ENTER key in any of the parameter selection menus selects the currently
displayed parameter and causes the interface to descend into the next parame-
ter selection menu. All parameter selection menus alternate between a blank dis-
play and the current selection in the right hand display.
Pressing the CODE SELECT key in a selection menu cancels the current selec-
tion activity and ascends back up to the next higher selection menu (or to Cd53
display mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds the interface reverts to
normal system display and the current selection menu is cancelled, but any pre-
viously committed changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configuration op-
tions and previously selected parameters as indicated above.
Parameter with the exception of “ASC” may not be altered if Cd53 is re-entered
if “ASC” is “On”. When ASC has completed including reaching the last setpoint
“done” on the left display and the MONTH DAY of completion on the right display
will be displayed as the second entry in the menu. Turning ASC off clears this
entry. This action also resets Cd53 to initial time remaining. ASC must then be
turned on to view or modify the additional parameters.
Whenever any auto pretrip test or Trip Start is initiated, ASC mode goes to OFF.
Display Only Functions - Cd54 through Cd58 are display only functions.
Cd54 Suction Port Superheat Reading for evaporator superheat (suction temperature minus suction saturation
/ Electronic Expansion temperature as calculated from suction pressure) is shown on the right display.
Valve Status Press the ENTER key at Cd54 to show reading for EEV position (in %) on left
display.
Cd55 Discharge Superheat Cd55 will display discharge superheat (discharge temperature minus discharge
saturation temperature as calculated from discharge pressure) values in C /F as
calculated by the discharge temperature minus the discharge saturation tem-
perature as calculated from discharge pressure. “-----” will be displayed if selec-
tion is not valid.

4–33 T-340
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code Title Description
Cd58 Water Pressure Cd58 will display “CLOSE” if the WPS or CFS switch contacts are closed or if
Switch / Condenser these options are not installed. “OPEn” is displayed when the WPS or CFS
Fan Switch State or switch contacts are open. When the WPS/CFS Override Logic is “TRUE”, the
Override Logic State right display will flash on all units.
NOTE:
1. This CLOSE/OPEn state displayed in this Code Select function only applies
to units that have the ability to detect the state of a WPS/CFS. This function
should not be relied upon to display the condition of the switch on units that don’t
have a WPS/CFS switch connected to ECG2 exclusively.
2. The right display will flash if the WPS/CFS Override Logic is TRUE on all units.
This is always the case, whether the unit has a WPS or CFS installed or not.
3. The ability of the WPS/CFS Override Logic to control the condenser fan is lim-
ited. It is not possible for this logic to control the fan on units that have the WPS
or CFS wired in series with the fan contactor. Units wired in this configuration can
indicate that the WPS/CFS Override Logic is active by flashing the right display,
however, the wiring will not allow for control of the condenser fan.
Configurable Functions - Cd59 through Cd70 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value
of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd59 Pump Down Logic Cd59 allows operation of the pump down logic control. The display will flash be-
tween “STArT PdN” and “PrESS EnTEr”.
Upon entering Cd59 the operator will be required to acknowledge that they want
to initiate the pump down control. The display will flash between “STArT P dN”
and “PrESS EnTEr”. Once the decision to continue is confirmed pump down log-
ic will begin, and will take complete control of the unit until pump down either suc-
ceeds or fails. This operation can not be halted once it begins without power
cycling the unit.
After pump down logic has been initiated, the operator will be notified to close
the Liquid Line Valve, the display will flash between “CLOSE LLV” and “PrESS
EnTEr”. Once complete the display will read “P dN” to the left, and the current
suction pressure to the right.
If the automatic pump down logic succeeds within 20 minutes, the unit will turn
itself off, and the display will notify the operator that pump down is complete by
flashing between “P dN DOnE” and “SHUT OFF”. The operator must then shut
off the unit.
If the automatic pump down logic does not complete within 20 minutes, the unit
will drop out of Cd59 and return to its previous control condition.
Cd60 Evaporator Fan Cd60 contains a selectable temperature range used to determine the engage-
Pulsing Temperature ment point of the Evaporator Fan Pulsing logic. Default setting is -18.1°C. The
Setting user may change the temperature by pressing the ENTER key, then scrolling to
the desired temperature using either Arrow key. Press the ENTER key to accept
the change. The temperature setting will be retained until either a Pre-Trip or Trip
Start is initiated at which time the temperature will set to the default setting.
“-----” will be displayed if CnF68 is configured OUT
Cd61 High Speed Cd61 is used to force evaporator fan speed to high while temperature control is
Evaporator Fan being performed in the perishable setpoint range. When set to “On”, evaporator
Setting fans operate in high speed regardless of any other active option that can control
evaporator fan speed.
Following a power cycle, the state of the function select code is retained at its
state prior to the power cycle. If “On”, this function select code will be set to “OFF”
when any trip start occurs or any pretrip test is initiated.
“-----” will be displayed if setpoint in frozen range or if CnF66 is configured OFF.

T-340 4–34
 Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code Title Description
Cd70 Temp Setpoint Lock Cd70 locks out setpoint selection, requiring the user to manually turn the lock off,
prior to making a setpoint change. If the setpoint lock is “ON”, and the user at-
tempts to enter a new setpoint, a message “SPLK” (Setpoint Lock) is in the left
display and “ON” in the right display for five seconds.
Press the ENTER key. “SPLK” will display along with the current setting of “ON”
or “OFF”. Use the Arrow keys to change the selection - the new selection will
then flash for five seconds. Press the ENTER key to confirm the new selection.
An event will be recorded in the DataCORDER each time the action of turning it
“ON” or “OFF” is taken.
Default setting is “OFF”. Unit will default to “OFF” with the selection of PTI or a
TripWise on the unit.

4–35 T-340
 Figure 4.13 Alarm Troubleshooting Sequence

Start

Unit does No Check Power Refer to Connect Power

self test? Supply Section 5.2

Yes

Did
No Refer to Connect Power
Evaporator Check Power
fans start? Supply Section 5.2

Yes

Correct No Install Latest Refer to Controller Software

software Software
version? Revision Section 4.2

Yes

Unit Load correct Refer to Configuration Software Variables

configured No unit
correctly? configuration Section 4.2.1

Yes

See alarm Refer to Controller Alarm Indications

Active Yes details &
Alarms? repair Section 4.6

No

Pass No Refer to Pre-Trip Diagnostics

Pre-trip Correct
inspection? all faults Section 4.7

Yes

Operating No Correct Refer to Refrigeration System Service

pressures Refrigerant
normal? issue Section 7.3

Yes

Unit OK

T-340 4–36
4.11 CONTROLLER ALARM INDICATIONS
Table 4–6 Controller Alarm Indications
Alarm Code Cause Components Troubleshooting Corrective Actions
AL03 Superheat has re- Electronic Expan- Check the operation of Replace EEV if defec-
Loss of Super- mained below 1.66°C sion Valve (EEV) the EEV using Cd41. tive.
heat Control (3°F) degrees for five Evaporator Tem- Verify accuracy of tem- Replace ETS or ETS1 if
minutes continuously perature Sen- perature sensors, refer defective.
while compressor run- sor(s) ETS & to Sensor Checkout Pro-
ning. ETS1. cedure Section 7.24.
Compressor drawing
more than 2.0 amps, Evaporator Fans Confirm fans operating Replace fan(s) if defec-
compressor pressure properly. tive, refer to EVAPORA-
ratio is greater than TOR FAN MOTOR
1.8, and Electronic Ex- ASSEMBLY Section
pansion Valve (EEV) is 7.15.
at 0% open.
AL05 Controller has detected Keypad Power cycle the unit. Resetting the unit may
Manual Defrost continuous Manual De- correct problem, monitor
Switch Failure frost Switch activity for the unit.
five minutes or more. If the alarm reappears
after 5 minutes replace
the keypad.
AL06 Controller has detected Keypad or Har- Power cycle the unit. Resetting the unit may
Keypad or one of the keypad keys ness correct problem, monitor
Keypad Harness is continuously activity. the unit.
Fail If the alarm reappears
replace the keypad and
harness.
AL07 The VPS is reading Vent Position Manually reposition vent If unable to obtain zero
Fresh Air Vent greater than 0 CMH Sensor (VPS) and confirm using Cd45. reading, replace defec-
Open while unit is in frozen Refer to VENT POSI- tive VPS.
mode or XtendFRESH TION SENSOR SER-
active. VICE Section 7.25.
AL08 Controller detects dis- Discharge Pres- Confirm accurate DPT Replace DPT if defec-
High Compres- charge pressure to sure Transducer pressure readings, refer tive.
sor Pressure suction pressure ratio (DPT) to MANIFOLD GAUGE
Ratio is too high. SET Section 7.2.
The controller will at-
tempt to correct the sit-
uation by restarting the
compressor.
AL10 Alarm 10 is triggered This is a display Refer to eAutoFresh The alarm is triggered off
CO2 Sensor when the CO2 sensor alarm and has no manual. when voltage is within
Failure voltage is operating associated failure operating range.
outside of the 0.9 v to action.
4.7 v range, or if the
sensor is out of range.

4–37 T-340
 Table 4–6 Controller Alarm Indications
Alarm Code Cause Components Troubleshooting Corrective Actions
AL14 Controller is unable to N/A Power cycle the unit. Resetting the unit may
Phase determine the correct correct problem, monitor
Sequence De- phase relationship. the unit.
tect Fault Wiring Check unit wiring. Correct wiring.
Confirm pressure read-
ings during start-up; suc-
tion pressure should
decrease and discharge
pressure should in-
crease.
Current Sensor Check Cd41, right most Replace current sensor if
digit: defective.
If display is 3 or 4 check
compressor / sensor wir-
ing.
If display is 5 the current
sensor is defective.
AL16 Compressor current Current Sensor Compare Cd3 to actual Replace current sensor if
Compressor draw is over the calcu- measured current at wire defective.
Current High lated maximum for 10 T1-T2 or T3 going to the
minutes. compressor contactor. If
there is a difference, de-
termine whether this is
caused by current sen-
sor or amp clamp tool.
Amperage is in- Confirm supply voltage/ Correct power supply.
deed too high. frequency is within spec-
ification and balanced
according to Electrical
Data Section 3.3.
Operating Condi- Make sure system pres- Check air flow of con-
tions sures are relevant to op- denser.
erating conditions. Check Refrigerant
charge, refer to RE-
FRIGERATION SYS-
TEM SERVICE Section
7.3.
Monitor Unit Alarm is display only the If alarm remains active
alarm may clear itself or is repetitive replace
during operation. compressor at next
available opportunity, re-
fer to COMPRESSOR
Service Section 7.8.

T-340 4–38
 Table 4–6 Controller Alarm Indications
Alarm Code Cause Components Troubleshooting Corrective Actions
AL17 Compressor has at- N/A Controller will attempt Resume normal
Compressor tempted to start in both restart every 20 minutes operation.
Pressure Delta directions and fails to and deactivate the alarm
Fault generate sufficient if successful.
pressure differential Discharge Pres- Confirm accurate DPT Replace DPT if defec-
between SPT and sure Transducer pressure readings, refer tive.
DPT. (DPT) to MANIFOLD GAUGE
SET Section 7.2.
Suction Pressure Confirm accurate SPT Replace SPT if defec-
Transducer (SPT) pressure readings, refer tive.
to MANIFOLD GAUGE
SET Section 7.2.
Monitor Unit Alarm is display only the If alarm remains active
alarm may clear itself or is repetitive replace
during operation. compressor at next
available opportunity.
AL18 Discharge pressure is Restrictions in the Ensure Liquid Line Ser- Open Liquid Line Ser-
Discharge over the maximum for refrigeration sys- vice Valve is fully open. vice Valve as needed.
Pressure High 10 minutes within the tem.
last hour. Filter Drier Check the filter drier, if it Replace the filter drier if
is iced up or very cold it needed, refer to FILTER
indicates that the filter DRIER Service Section
drier needs replacement. 7.13.
Condenser Fan Check Condenser Fan Correct as required.
for proper operation.
Discharge Pres- Confirm accurate DPT Replace DPT if defec-
sure Transducer pressure readings, refer tive.
(DPT) to MANIFOLD GAUGE
SET Section 7.2.
Non-condens- With the unit off allow Correct as required, re-
ables in the refrig- system to stabilize to fer to Refrigerant Charge
eration system. ambient temperature. Section 7.7.1.
Check system pressure
against PT Chart for
134a, refer to Table 7–5.
Refrigerant Check refrigerant level. Correct as required, re-
fer to Refrigerant Charge
Section 7.7.1.

4–39 T-340
 Table 4–6 Controller Alarm Indications
Alarm Code Cause Components Troubleshooting Corrective Actions
AL19 Discharge temperature Restrictions in the Ensure the Discharge Open the Discharge Ser-
Discharge exceeds 135°C refrigeration sys- Service Valve is fully vice Valve as needed.
Temperature (275°F) for 10 minutes tem. open.
High within the last hour. Check the unit for air Clean or remove any de-
flow restrictions. bris from coils.
Non-condens- With the unit off allow Correct as required, re-
ables in the refrig- system to stabilize to fer to Refrigerant Charge
eration system. ambient temperature. Section 7.7.1.
Check system pressure
against PT Chart for
134a, refer to Table 7–5.
Additional Alarms Check compressor If the alarm persists, it
such as AL16, operation. may indicate a failing
AL24. compressor, replace the
compressor, refer to
COMPRESSOR Ser-
vice Section 7.8.
AL20 Control power fuse Check F3A, if the Check PA, PB, CH coils Replace the defective
Control (F3A or F3B) is open. fuse is open: for short to ground, if coil.
Contactor Fuse short is found: Replace the fuse.
(F3) Check F3B, if the Check ESV coil resis- Replace the defective
fuse is open: tance at TP7 to TP9, if coil.
short to ground, or if re- Replace the fuse.
sistance is less than 4
ohms, coil is defective.
Check CF, ES, EF, HR
coils for short to ground,
if short is found, coil is
defective.
Check Voltage at If voltage is present, it in- Refer to Controller Ser-
QC1: dicates a defective mi- vice Section 7.23.
croprocessor.
AL21 One of the 18 VAC System Sensors Check system sensors Replace defective sen-
Control Circuit controller fuses (F1/F2) for short to ground. sor(s).
Fuse (F1/F2) is open. Refer to Cd08. Wiring Check wiring for short to Repair as needed.
ground.
Controller Controller may have an Replace controller, refer
internal short. to Controller Service
Section 7.23.
AL22 Evaporator motor inter- Evaporator Motor Shut down unit, discon- Replace defective evap-
Evaporator IP nal protector (IP) is nect power, & check orator fan motor, refer to
open. Evaporator Motor IP at EVAPORATOR FAN
plug connection pins 4 & MOTOR Service Sec-
6. tion 7.15.
AL23 Controller fails to de- Incoming Power Check incoming power Correct power source as
Loss of Phase B tect current draw. source. required.
AL24 Compressor internal Compressor Shut down unit discon- Monitor unit, if alarm re-
Compressor IP protector (IP) is open. nect power, & check re- mains active or is repeti-
sistance of compressor tive replace the
windings at contactor compressor at the next
T1-T2, T2-T3. available opportunity, re-
fer to COMPRESSOR
Service Section 7.8.

T-340 4–40
 Table 4–6 Controller Alarm Indications
Alarm Code Cause Components Troubleshooting Corrective Actions
AL25 Condenser fan motor Insufficient Air Shut down unit and Remove obstructions.
Condenser IP internal protector (IP) is Flow check condenser fan for
open. obstructions.
Condenser Fan Shut down unit, discon- Replace defective con-
Motor nect power, & check denser fan motor, refer
Condenser Fan Motor IP to Condenser Fan Motor
at plug connection pins 1 Assembly Service Sec-
& 2. tion 7.11.
AL26 Sensors out of range. All sensors de- Perform Pre-trip P5: If P5 passes, no further
All Sensors Fail- tected as out of action is required.
ure: range If P5 fails, replace the
Supply/Return defective sensor as de-
Probes termined by P5, refer to
TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR Service Section
7.24.
AL27 Controller AD convert- Controller Power cycle the unit. If Replace defective micro-
Analog to Digital er faulty. the alarm persists, it indi- processor, refer to Con-
Accuracy Fail- cates a defective micro- troller Service Section
ure processor. 7.23.
AL28 Suction pressure too N/A Power cycle the unit. Resetting the unit may
Low Suction low for normal opera- correct problem, monitor
Pressure tion. the unit.
Suction Pressure Confirm accurate SPT Replace SPT if defec-
Transducer (SPT) pressure readings, refer tive.
to MANIFOLD GAUGE
SET Section 7.2.
Discharge Pres- Confirm accurate DPT Replace DPT if defec-
sure Transducer pressure readings, refer tive.
(DPT) to MANIFOLD GAUGE
SET Section 7.2.
AL29 Alarm 29 is triggered if Alarm LED will be Refer to eAutoFresh The alarm is triggered off
AutoFresh CO2 or O2 level is out- activated and user manual. when atmospheric con-
Failure side of the limit range intervention is re- ditions are within limit
and the vent position is quired. settings.
at 100% for longer than
90 minutes.
AL50 VPS Sensor out of Vent Position Make sure VPS is se- Manually tighten panel.
Air Vent Position range. Sensor (VPS) cure.
Sensor (VPS) If the alarm persists, re- Replace VPS.
place the sensor or the
assembly.
AL51 Controller Memory Controller Pressing the ENTER key If action is successful (all
EEPROM Fail- Failure when “CLEAr” is dis- alarms are inactive),
ure played will result in an at- alarm 51 will be reset.
tempt to clear the alarm.
Power cycle the unit. If Replace defective con-
the alarm persists, it indi- troller, refer to Controller
cates defective controller Service Section 7.23.
memory.

4–41 T-340
 Table 4–6 Controller Alarm Indications
Alarm Code Cause Components Troubleshooting Corrective Actions
AL52 Alarm list queue is full Active Alarms Repair any alarms in the Clear alarms, refer to
EEPROM Alarm queue that are active. In- CONTROLLER
List Full dicated by “AA”. ALARMS Section 4.6.
AL53 Battery voltage low Battery If this alarm occurs on To clear the alarm press
Battery Pack start up, allow a unit fit- the ENTER and ALT
Failure ted with rechargeable keys simultaneously at
batteries to operate for the startup of Cd19 (Bat-
up to 24 hours to charge tery Check).
rechargeable batteries If alarm persists, replace
sufficiently. Once fully the battery pack, refer to
charged, the alarm will Section 7.23.5 Battery
deactivate. Replacement.
AL54 Invalid Supply Tem- Supply Tempera- Perform Pre-trip P5: If P5 passes, no further
Primary Supply perature Sensor (STS) ture Sensor (STS) action is required.
Sensor (STS) reading. If P5 fails, replace the
defective sensor as de-
termined by P5, refer to
TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR Service Section
7.24.
AL56 Invalid Return Tem- Return Tempera- Perform Pre-trip P5: If P5 passes, no further
Primary Return perature Sensor (RTS) ture Sensor (RTS) action is required.
Sensor (RTS) reading. If P5 fails, replace the
defective sensor as de-
termined by P5, refer to
TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR Service Section
7.24.
AL57 Invalid Ambient Tem- Ambient Tem- Test the AMBS, refer to Replace AMBS if defec-
Ambient Sensor perature Sensor perature Sensor Sensor Checkout Proce- tive, refer to TEMPERA-
(AMBS) (AMBS) reading. (AMBS) dure Section 7.24.1. TURE SENSOR Service
Section 7.24.
AL58 High pressure safety High Pressure Test the HPS; refer to Replace HPS if defec-
Compressor switch remains open Switch (HPS) Checking High Pressure tive, refer to Sensor Re-
High Pressure for at least one minute. Switch, Section 7.9.1. placement, Section
Safety (HPS) 7.24.
Refrigeration Sys- Check unit for air flow re- Clean or remove any de-
tem strictions. bris from coils.
AL59 Heat Termination Ther- Heat Termination Check for 24 volts at test Replace HTT if defec-
Heater Termina- mostat (HTT) is open. Thermostat (HTT) point TP10, if no voltage tive, refer to Sensor Re-
tion Thermostat at TP10 after unit has placement Section
(HTT) reached set point HTT is 7.24.2.
open.
AL60 Failure of the Defrost Defrost Tempera- Test the DTS; refer to Replace the DTS if de-
Defrost Tem- Temperature Sensor ture Sensor (DTS) Sensor Checkout Proce- fective, refer to Sensor
perature Sensor (DTS) to open. dure Section 7.24.1. Replacement Section
(DTS) 7.24.2.

T-340 4–42
 Table 4–6 Controller Alarm Indications
Alarm Code Cause Components Troubleshooting Corrective Actions
AL61 Improper current draw Heater(s) While in heat or defrost Replace heater(s) if de-
Heater Current during heat or defrost mode, check for proper fective, refer to Section
Draw Fault mode. current draw at heater 7.14.2 Evaporator Heat-
contactors, refer to er Removal and Re-
ELECTRICAL DATA placement.
Section 3.3.
Contactor Check voltage at heater Replace heater contac-
contactor on the heater tor if defective.
side. If no voltage pres-
ent:
AL63 Unit operating above Refrigeration Check unit for air flow re- Clean or remove any de-
Current Limit current limit. System strictions. bris from coils.
Check unit for proper op- Repair as needed.
eration.
Power supply Confirm supply voltage/ Correct power supply.
frequency is within spec-
ification and balanced
according to ELECTRI-
CAL DATA Section 3.3.
Current limit set Check current limit set- The current limit can be
too low ting Code Cd32. raised (maximum of 23
amps) using Cd32.
AL64 Discharge Tempera- Discharge tem- Test the CPDS; refer to Replace the CPDS if de-
Discharge ture sensor out of perature sensor Sensor Checkout Proce- fective, refer to Sensor
Temperature range. (CPDS). dure, Section 7.24.1. Replacement Section
Sensor (CPDS) 7.24.2.
AL65 Compressor Discharge Compressor Dis- Confirm accurate DPT Replace DPT if defec-
Discharge Pres- Transducer is out of charge Transduc- pressure readings, refer tive.
sure Transducer range. er (DPT) to MANIFOLD GAUGE
(DPT) SET Section 7.2.
AL66 Suction Pressure Suction Pressure Confirm accurate EPT Replace EPT/SPT if de-
(SPT) Suction Transducer (SPT) out Transducer (SPT) and SPT pressure read- fective.
Pressure Trans- of range. ings, refer to MANIFOLD
ducer, GAUGE SET Section
(EPT) Evapora- 7.2.
tor Pressure - Performing a Pre-trip 5-
Transducer 9 test will also check the
transducers.
Monitor If the alarm persists, it
may indicate a failing
compressor, refer to
COMPRESSOR Ser-
vice Section 7.8.
AL67 Humidity Sensor (HS) Humidity Sensor Make sure the humidity Monitor, replace HS if
Humidity Sensor reading out of range. (HS) sensor is properly con- alarm persists.
nected in the socket.
Make sure the humidity
sensor wires have not
been damaged.
AL69 Evaporator Tempera- Evaporator Tem- Test the ETS1, refer to Replace Evaporator
Evaporator ture Sensor (ETS1) out perature Sensor Sensor Checkout Proce- Temperature Sensor
Temp Sensor of range. (ETS1) dure Section 7.14.2. (ETS1) if defective.
(ETS1)

4–43 T-340
 Table 4–6 Controller Alarm Indications
Alarm Code Cause Components Troubleshooting Corrective Actions
AL70 Secondary Supply Secondary Sup- Perform Pre-trip P5: If P5 passes, no further
Secondary Sup- Sensor (SRS) is out of ply Sensor (SRS) action is required.
ply Sensor range. If P5 fails, replace the
(SRS) defective sensor as de-
termined by P5, refer to
TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR Service Section
7.24.
AL71 Secondary Return Secondary Return Perform Pre-trip P5: If P5 passes, no further
Secondary Sensor (RRS) is out of Sensor (RRS) action is required.
Return Sensor range. If P5 fails, replace the
(RRS) defective sensor as de-
termined by P5, refer to
TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR Service Section
7.24.
AL72 After the unit goes in- Refrigeration Ensure unit is operating Power cycle unit.
Control Temp range for 30 minutes System correctly. Control Temperature is
Out of Range then out of range for a in In-range.
continuous 120 min- Any Pre-trip mode, re-
utes. sets the timers.
NOTE
If the controller is configured for four probes without a DataCORDER, the DataCORDER alarms
AL70 and AL71 will be processed as Controller alarms AL70 and AL71. See Table 4–10.

T-340 4–44
 Table 4–6 Controller Alarm Indications
Alarm Code Cause Components Troubleshooting Corrective Actions
ERR # Internal The controller performs self-check routines. If an internal failure occurs,
Microprocessor an “ERR” alarm will appear on the display. This is an indication the con-
Failure troller needs to be replaced.
ERROR DESCRIPTION
ERR 0-RAM fail- Indicates that the controller working memory has
ure failed.
ERR 1-Program Indicates a problem with the controller program.
Memory failure
ERR 2-Watchdog The controller program has entered a mode whereby
time-out the controller program has stopped executing.
ERR 3-N/A N/A
ERR 4-N/A N/A
ERR 5-A-D failure The controller’s Analog to Digital (A-D) converter has
failed.
ERR 6-IO Board Internal program/update failure.
failure
ERR 7-Controller Internal version/firmware incompatible.
failure
ERR 8-Data- Internal DataCORDER memory failure.
CORDER failure
ERR 9-Controller Internal controller memory failure.
failure
In the event that a failure occurs and the display cannot be updated, the
status LED will indicate the appropriate ERR code using Morse code as
shown below.

Entr StPt Enter Set point (Press

The controller is prompting the operator to enter a set point.
Arrow & Enter)
LO Low Main Voltage
(Function Codes Cd27- This message will be alternately displayed with the set point whenever
38 disabled and NO the supply voltage is less than 75% of its proper value.
alarm stored.)

4–45 T-340
4.12 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes
NOTE
“Auto” or “Auto1” menu includes the: P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6 and rSLts. “Auto2” menu includes P0, P1, P2, P3,
P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9, P10 and rSLts. “Auto3” menu includes P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7 and P8.
Table 4–7 Controller Pre-trip Test Codes
Code Description Detail
P0-0 Pre-Trip Initiated: Container identifier code, Cd18 Software Revision Number, Cd20 Contain-
Configuration Display, In- er Unit Model Number, & configuration database identifier CFMMYYDD
dicator Lamps, LEDs, and are displayed in sequence.
Displays Next the unit will indicate the presence or non-presence of an RMU ac-
cording to whether any RMU inquiry messages have been received since
the unit was booted.
Units equipped with Autoslide Enabled (Cnf44) will cause the vent to seek
to its closed position, followed by two sequences of opening to 100% and
returning to the closed position. No other autoslide mode of operation will
be available until the two cycles of opening and closing have completed.
Since the system cannot recognize lights and display failures, there are no
test codes or results associated with this phase of Pretrip. To know if the
test passes the operator must observe that the LCD display elements and
the indicator lights behave as described below.
P1 Tests - Heaters Current Draw: Heater is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within specified
range. No other system components will change state during this test.
P1-0 Heaters Turned On Heater starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and then the
heater is turned on. After 15 seconds, the current draw is measured again.
The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if the change in current draw test is in the range specified.
P1-1 Heaters Turned Off Heater is then turned off. After 10 seconds, the current draw is measured.
The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if the change in current draw test is in the range specified.
P2 Tests - Condenser Fan Current Draw: Condenser fan is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall
within specified range. No other system components will change state during this test. If the Water Pres-
sure Switch is open this test will be skipped.
P2-0 Condenser Fan On Condenser fan starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and
condenser fan is then turned on. After 15 seconds the current draw is mea-
sured again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
P2-1 Condenser Fan Off Condenser fan is then turned off. After 10 seconds the current draw is
measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
P3 Tests - Low Speed Evaporator Fan Current Draw: The system must be equipped with a low speed
evaporator fan, as determined by CnF02, the Evaporator Fan Speed Select configuration variable. Low
speed evaporator fan is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within specified range. No other sys-
tem components will change state during this test.
NOTE
If unit configured for single evaporator fan operation and either AL11 or AL12 is active at the start of
either test, then the test will fail immediately. If AL11 or AL12 become active during the test, then the
test will fail upon conclusion of the test.

T-340 4–46
 Table 4–7 Controller Pre-trip Test Codes
P3-0 Low Speed Evaporator High speed evaporator fans will be turned on for 20 seconds, the fans will
Fan Motors On be turned off for 4 seconds, current draw is measured, and then the low
speed evaporator fans are turned on. After 60 seconds the current draw is
measured again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
P3-1 Low Speed Evaporator Low speed evaporator fans are then turned off. After 10 seconds the cur-
Fan Motors Off rent draw is measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
P4 Tests - High Speed Evaporator Fans Current Draw: High speed evaporator fans are turned on,
then off. Current draw must fall within specified range and measured current changes must exceed spec-
ified ratios. No other system components will change state during this test.
NOTE

NOTE
If unit configured for single evaporator fan operation and either AL11 or AL12 is active at the start of either
test, then the test will fail immediately. If AL11 or AL12 become active during the test, then the test will fail
upon conclusion of the test.
P4-0 High Speed Evaporator Evaporator fans start in the off condition, current draw is measured, then
Fan Motors On high speed evaporator fans will be turned on. After 60 seconds the current
draw is measured again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw in the specified range AND mea-
sured current changes exceed specified ratios.
If the three phase motors are configured IN, the change ratio test is
skipped.
P4-1 High Speed Evaporator High speed evaporator fans are then turned off. After 10 seconds the cur-
Fan Motors Off rent draw is measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
P5 Tests - Air Stream Temperature Sensor Tests: Tests the validity of the Air Stream Temperature
Sensors.
P5-0 Supply / Return Probe The High Speed Evaporator Fan is turned on and run for eight minutes,
Test with all other outputs de-energized. A temperature comparison is made be-
tween the return and supply probes.
Test passes if temperature comparison falls within the specified range.
NOTE
If this test fails, “P5-0” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both Probe
tests (this test and the PRIMARY/SECONDARY) pass, display
will read “P5” “PASS.”
P5-1 Supply Probe Test This test if for units equipped with secondary supply probe only.
The temperature difference between primary supply probe and secondary
supply probe is compared.
Test passes if temperature comparison falls within the specified range.
NOTE
If this test fails, “P5-1” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both Probe
tests (this and the SUPPLY/RETURN TEST) pass, because of the
multiple tests, the display will read “P5” “PASS.”

4–47 T-340
 Table 4–7 Controller Pre-trip Test Codes
P5-2 Return Probe Test For units equipped with secondary return probe only.
The temperature difference between return temperature sensor (RTS) and
return temperature sensor (RRS) probe is compared.
Test passes if temperature comparison falls within the specified range.
NOTES
1. If this test fails, “P5-2” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both Probe
tests (this test and the SUPPLY/RETURN) pass, because of the
multiple tests, the display will read “P 5,” “PASS.”
2. The results of Pre-trip tests 5-0, 5-1 and 5-2 will be used to
activate or clear control probe alarms.
P5-3 Evaporator Fan Direction If configured for three phase evaporator fan motors:
Test With evaporator fan running on high speed, measure the temperature dif-
ference between the primary supply and primary return probes. Turn the
heaters on for 60 seconds then measure the temperature difference be-
tween the primary supply and primary return probes for up to 120 addition-
al seconds.
This is a Pass/Fail test. The test passes if differential of STS is 0.25°C
higher than RTS.
Test P5-0 must pass before this test is run.
P5-7 Primary vs. Secondary This is a Pass/Fail test of the primary evaporator temperature sensor
Evaporator Temperature (ETS1) and secondary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS2).
Sensor Test Test passes if secondary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS2) is within
+/- 0.5°C of the primary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS1).
P5-8 Primary Evaporator Pres- This is a Pass/Fail test of the Primary Evaporator Pressure Transducer.
sure Transducer Test Test passes if suction pressure transducer (SPT) is within +/- 0 psi of sat-
uration pressure at current evaporator temperature. Also passes if SPT is
within +/- 1 psi of discharge pressure 6 hours after a power interruption.
Test P5-7 must pass before this test is run.
P5-9 Suction (Evaporator) Pres- Units equipped with a secondary Evaporator pressure transducer.
sure Transducer Test Test passes if suction pressure transducer (SPT) is within +/- 1.5 psi of the
evaporator pressure transducer (EPT).
Test P5-8 must pass before this test is run.
P5-10 Humidity Sensor Control- This is a Pass/Fail/Skip test of the humidity sensor configuration.
ler Configuration Verifica- Test passes if the controller configuration has humidity sensor in.
tion Test
Test fails if the controller configuration has humidity sensor out and Vout
is greater than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
Test is skipped if the controller configuration has the humidity sensor out
and Vout is less than 0.20 Volts.
Test P5-9 must pass before this test is run.
P5-11 Humidity Sensor Installa- This is a Pass/Fail test of humidity sensor installation (sensor is present).
tion Verification Test Test passes if Vout is greater than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
Test fails if Vout is less than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
Test P5-10 must pass before this test is run.
P5-12 Humidity Sensor Range This is a Pass/Fail test of the Humidity Sensor Range.
Check Test Test passes if Vout for the humidity sensor is between 0.33 and 4 Volts.
Test fails if Vout is outside of this range.
Test P5-11 must pass before this test is run.

T-340 4–48
 Table 4–7 Controller Pre-trip Test Codes
P6 Tests - Refrigerant Probes, Compressor and Refrigerant Valves: Pass/Fail testing is performed for
the compressor, EEV, DUV, LIV (if equipped), ESV, and the refrigerant pressure and temperature sensors.
P6-0 Discharge Thermistor Test If Alarm 64 is active the test fails. Otherwise, the test passes.
P6-1 Suction Thermistor Test If the Suction Temperature Sensor (CPSS) both is configured ON and is
invalid, the test fails. Otherwise the test passes.
P6-2 Discharge Pressure Sen- If Alarm 65 is active any time during the first 45 second period, the test
sor Test fails. Otherwise, the test passes.
P6-3 Suction Pressure Sensor If Alarm 66 is active the test fails. Otherwise the test passes.
Test
P6-4 Compressor Current Draw Compressor current is tested before and 10 seconds after start up. If cur-
Test rent does not increase, the test fails. P6-7 is run at the end of P6-4. If this
test fails, P6-6 is skipped.
P6-5 Compressor Leak Test Pre-trip P6-5 ensures that the compressor holds pressure. After compres-
sor pump up and pump down, the compressor is turned off for 62 seconds.
When suction side pressure holds (less than 8 psi rise) for 10 seconds, P6-
5 passes, otherwise the Compressor Leak Test fails.
NOTE
P6-6 through P6-10 are conducted by changing status of each valve and comparing suction pressure
change and/or compressor current change with predetermined values. Tests will cause compressor and
condenser fans to cycle on and off as needed to generate the pressure required for individual Pre-trip
sub tests. The compressor will start in order to build discharge pressure, followed by compressor pump
down sequence. At the conclusion of compressor pump down sequence, the compressor will shut down
and the valve test will start.
P6-6 Economizer Valve Test Passes if suction pressure increases a minimum of 4 psia when the valve
opens for 15 seconds.
P6-7 Digital Unloader Valve Passes if pressure and current changes are within 3 seconds of DUV
Test switch signal and either the pressure change or the current draw change
is above 5 psi or above 1.5A, respectively.
P6-9 Liquid Injection Valve Test (If equipped) Test passes if change of suction pressure is greater than 4
psia when the valve opens for 10 seconds. Otherwise, it fails.
P6-10 Electronic Expansion The test records the suction pressure during the open valve position and
Valve Test passes if the suction pressure increase is above 3 psi when the valve
opens for 10 seconds.

4–49 T-340
 Table 4–7 Controller Pre-trip Test Codes
P7 Tests - High Pressure Tests: Unit is run at full capacity without condenser fan running to make sure
that the HPS opens and closes properly.
NOTE
P7-0 & P8 are included with “Auto 2 & Auto 3” only. P9-0 through P10 are included with “Auto2” only.
P7-0 High Pressure Switch Test is skipped if sensed ambient temperature is less than 7.2°C (45°F),
(HPS) Opening Test return air temperature is less than -17.8°C (0°F), or the water pressure
switch is open.
With the unit running, the condenser fan is turned off and a 900 second (15
minute) timer is started. The right display shows Discharge Pressure if the
sensor is configured and valid, else Discharge Temperature. The unit
needs to disable Discharge Pressure limit and enable Current Limit
checks.
The test fails immediately if:
-Ambient Temperature Sensor invalid
-Composite Return Temperature Sensor invalid
-HPS is open
The test fails if:
-HPS fails to open before 900 seconds total test time.
-Evaporator or Compressor IP Alarm.
-Calculated Dome Temperature exceeds 137.78°C (280°F).
-Discharge pressure exceeds 370 psig.
-Compressor Current exceeds limits
The test passes if HPS opens within the 15 minute time limit.
P7-1 High Pressure Switch If return temperature greater than -2.4°C, set setpoint to -5.0°C, else set
(HPS) Closing Test setpoint to -30°C. Restart unit according to normal startup logic. Run unit
normally for 120 seconds.
The test passes if the high pressure switch closes within 75 seconds after
end of Test 7-0, else the test fails.
Test P7-0 must pass for this test to execute.
P8 Tests - Perishable Mode Tests: Pretrip tests P7-0 and P7-1 must have passed or have been
skipped for these tests to execute.
P8-0 Perishable Mode Test If the control temperature is below 15.6°C, the setpoint is changed to
15.6°C, and a 180 Minute timer is started. The control will then be placed
in the equivalent of normal heating. If the control temperature is above
15.6°C. at the start of the test, then the test proceeds immediately to test
8-1. While in test 8-0 the right display will show the value of the control tem-
perature.
The test fails if the 180 Minute timer expires before the control temperature
reaches setpoint - 0.3°C. If the test fails, it will not auto-repeat. There is no
pass display for this test. Once the control temperature reaches setpoint,
the test proceeds to test 8-1.

T-340 4–50
 Table 4–7 Controller Pre-trip Test Codes
P8-1 Perishable Mode Pull Control temperature must be at least 15.6°C (60°F).
Down Test / eAutofresh The set point is changed to 0°C (32°F), and a 180-minute timer is started.
CO2 Sensor Calibration The left display will read “P8-1,” the right display will show the supply air
temperature. The unit will then start to pull down the temperature to the
0°C set point.
The test passes if the container temperature reaches set point before the
180-minute timer expires.
On units where the CO2 Sensor Status indicates that a CO2 sensor is pres-
ent, calibration of the CO2 sensor will be attempted during P8-1. Once P8-
1 begins, calibration will be attempted when the supply temperature goes
below 5°C. If the CO2 sensor voltage reads within the 0.95 <>1.15Vdc
range before the end of P8-1, the sensor will be calibrated by holding the
CO2 zero line low for 4 seconds. Once calibration is performed, the sensor
voltage will be verified to make sure it is in the 0.95 to 1.05 Vdc range. If
the voltage is not within this range, CO2 sensor calibration fails.
P8-2 Perishable Mode Maintain Test P8-1 must pass for P8-2 to execute.
Temperature Test A fifteen minute timer is started, and the system will attempt to minimize
control temperature error (supply temperature minus setpoint) until the tim-
er expires. The control temperature will be sampled each minute starting
at the beginning of P8-2.
During P8-2, the left display will read “P8-2,” and the right display will show
the supply air temperature.
When the test is completed, the average control temperature error will be
compared to the pass/fail criteria.
Test passes if the average temperature error is within +/- 1.0°C.
Test fails if the average temperature error is greater than +/- 1.0°C, or if the
DataCORDER supply temperature probe is invalid. If the test fails, the con-
trol probe temperature will be recorded as -50.0°C.
P9 Test - DTT Close and Open Test: The DTT in this control is not a physical device, with actual metal-
lic contacts, it is a software function that acts similar to a thermostat. Using various temperature inputs,
the DTT function determines whether a thermostat mounted on the Evaporator Coil would have OPEN or
CLOSED contacts. Primarily, the DTT function operates based on the temperature reading from the
Defrost Termination Sensor.
P9-0 DTT Closed and Open During P9-0 the defrost temperature sensor (DTS) reading will be dis-
Test played on the left display. The right display will show the supply air tem-
perature.
The unit will run FULL COOL for 30 minutes maximum until the DTT is con-
sidered closed. This step may not have to be executed. Once the DTT is
considered closed, the unit simulates defrost by running the heaters for up
to two hours, or until the DTT is considered open.
Test fails if:
The DTT is not considered closed after 30 minutes of full cooling.
HTT opens when DTT is considered closed or if return air tem-
perature rises above 248°C (120°F).
Test passes if the DTT is considered open within the 2 hour heat cycle time
limit.

4–51 T-340
 Table 4–7 Controller Pre-trip Test Codes
P10 Tests - Frozen Mode Tests:
P10-0 Frozen Mode Heat Test If the container temperature is below 7.2°C, the setpoint is changed to
7.2°C, and a 180 Minute timer is started. The control will then be placed in
the equivalent of normal heating. If the container temperature is above
7.2°C. at the start of the test, then the test proceeds immediately to test 10-
1. During this test, the control temperature will be shown on the right dis-
play.
The test fails if the 180 Minute timer expires before the control temperature
reaches setpoint - 0.3°C. If the test fails, it will not auto-repeat. There is no
pass display for this test. Once the control temperature reaches setpoint,
the test proceeds to test 10-1.
P10-1 Frozen Mode Pulldown Control temperature must be at least 7.2°C (45°F)
Test The setpoint is changed to -17.8°C. The system will then attempt to pull
down the control temperature to setpoint using normal frozen mode cool-
ing. During this test, the control temperature will be shown on the right dis-
play.
The test passes if the control temperature reaches setpoint minus 0.3°C
before the 180 minute timer expires. Otherwise, the test fails. Upon failure
and when initiated by an automatic Pre-trip sequence, P10-1 will auto-re-
peat once by starting P10-0 over again.
P10-2 Frozen Mode Maintain Test P10-1 must pass for this test to execute.
Temperature Test Same as for test 8-2 except the control temperature is the return probe
temperature.
The average error must be +/-1.6°C. If the DataCORDER supply tempera-
ture probe is invalid, the test fails and the control probe temperature will be
recorded as -50°C. Upon failure and when initiated by an automatic Pre-
trip sequence, P10-2 will auto-repeat by starting P10-0 over again.

T-340 4–52
 Table 4–8 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments
NOTE
Inapplicable Functions Display “-----”
To Access: Press the ALT. MODE key
Code Title Description
dC1 Recorder Supply Temperature Current reading of the supply recorder sensor.
dC2 Recorder Return Temperature Current reading of the return recorder sensor.
dC3-5 USDA 1, 2, 3 Temperatures Current readings of the three USDA probes.
dC6-13 Network Data Points 1-8 Current values of the network data points (as configured). Data point
1 (Code 6) is generally the humidity sensor and its value is obtained
from the controller once every minute.
dC14 Cargo Probe 4 Temperature Current reading of the cargo probe #4.
dC15-19 Future Expansion These codes are for future expansion, and are not in use at this time.
dC20-24 Temperature Sensors 1-5 Current calibration offset values for each of the five probes: supply,
Calibration return, USDA #1, #2, and #3. These values are entered via the in-
terrogation program.
dC25 Future Expansion This code is for future expansion, and is not in use at this time.
dC26,27 S/N, Left 4, Right 4 The DataCORDER serial number consists of eight characters.
Function code dC26 contains the first four characters. Function
code dC27 contains the last four characters. (This serial number is
the same as the controller serial number.)
dC28 Minimum Days Left An approximation of the number of logging days remaining until the
DataCORDER starts to overwrite the existing data.
dC29 Days Stored Number of days of data that are currently stored in the DataCORDER.
dC30 Date of Last Trip start The date when a Trip Start was initiated by the user. In addition, if the
system goes without power for seven continuous days or longer, a
trip start will automatically be generated on the next AC power up.
Press and hold the ENTER key for five seconds to initiate a “Trip
Start.”
dC31 Battery Test Results Shows the current status of the optional battery pack.
PASS: Battery pack is fully charged.
FAIL: Battery pack voltage is low.
dC32 Time: Hour, Minute Current time on the real time clock (RTC) in the DataCORDER.
dC33 Date: Month, Day Current date (month and day) on the RTC in the DataCORDER.
dC34 Date: Year Current year on the RTC in the DataCORDER.
dC35 Cargo Probe 4 Calibration Current calibration value for the Cargo Probe. This value is an input
via the interrogation program.

4–53 T-340
 Table 4–9 DataCORDER Pre-trip Result Records
Test Title Data
1-0 Heater On Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
1-1 Heater Off Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
2-0 Condenser Fan On Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Water pressure switch (WPS) - Open /
Closed; Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
2-1 Condenser Fan Off Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
3-0 Low Speed Evaporator Fan On Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
3-1 Low Speed Evaporator Fan Off Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
4-0 High Speed Evaporator Fan On Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
4-1 High Speed Evaporator Fan Off Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
5-0 Supply / Return Probe Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, RTS, SRS and RRS
5-1 Secondary Supply Probe Pass / Fail / Skip
(SRS) Test
5-2 Secondary Return Probe Pass / Fail / Skip
(RRS) Test
6-0 Discharge Thermistor Test Pass / Fail / Skip
6-1 Suction Thermistor Test Pass / Fail / Skip
6-2 Discharge Pressure Pass / Fail / Skip
Transducer Test
6-3 Suction Pressure Pass / Fail / Skip
Transducer Test
6-4 Compressor Current Draw Test Pass / Fail / Skip
6-5 Compressor Leak Test Pass / Fail / Skip
6-6 Economizer Valve Test Pass / Fail / Skip
6-7 Digital Unloader Valve Test Pass / Fail / Skip
6-9 Liquid Injection Valve Test Pass / Fail / Skip
(If equipped)
6-10 Electronic Expansion Valve Test Pass / Fail / Skip
7-0 High Pressure Switch Closed Pass / Fail / Skip Result, AMBS, DPT or CPT (if equipped)
Input values that component opens
7-1 High Pressure Switch Open Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, DPT or CPT (if equipped)
Input values that component closes
8-0 Perishable Mode Heat Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, time it takes to heat to 16°C (60°F)
8-1 Perishable Mode Pulldown Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, time it takes to pull down to 0°C (32°F)
8-2 Perishable Mode Maintain Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Averaged DataCORDER supply tempera-
ture (SRS) over last recording interval.
9-0 Defrost Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, DTS reading at end of test, line voltage, line
frequency, time in defrost.
10-0 Frozen Mode Heat Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, time unit is in heat.
10-1 Frozen Mode Pulldown Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, STS, time to pull down unit to -17.8°C (0°F).
10-2 Frozen Mode Maintain Test Pass / Fail / Skip Result, Averaged DataCORDER return temperature
(RRS) over last recording interval.

T-340 4–54
 Table 4–10 DataCORDER Alarm Indications
To Access: Press ALT. MODE key then ALARM LIST key
Code Title Description
dAL70 Recorder Supply Temperature The supply recorder sensor reading is outside of the range of -50°C
Out of Range to 70°C (-58°F to +158°F), or the probe check logic has determined
there is a fault with this sensor.
NOTE
The P5 Pre-trip test must be run to inactivate the alarm.
dAL71 Recorder Return Temperature The return recorder sensor reading is outside of the range of -50°C
Out of Range to 70°C (-58°F to +158°F), or the probe check logic has determined
there is a fault with this sensor.
NOTE
The P5 Pre-trip test must be run to inactivate the alarm.
dAL72-74 USDA Temperatures 1, 2, 3 The USDA probe temperature reading is outside of -50°C to 70°C
Out of Range (-58°F to +158°F) range.
dAL75 Cargo Probe 4 Out of Range The cargo probe temperature reading is outside of -50°C to 70°C
(-58°F to +158°F) range.
dAL76, 77 Future Expansion These alarms are for future expansion and are not in use at this time.
dAL78-85 Network Data Point 1 - 8 Out of The network data point is outside of its specified range. The Data-
Range CORDER is configured by default to record the supply and return re-
corder sensors. The DataCORDER may be configured to record up to
eight additional network data points. An alarm number (AL78 to AL85)
is assigned to each configured point. When an alarm occurs, the Data-
CORDER must be interrogated to identify the data point assigned.
When a humidity sensor is installed, it is usually assigned to AL78.
dAL86 RTC Battery Low The real time clock (RTC) backup battery is too low to adequately
maintain the RTC reading.
A real time clock failure is critical to the operation of the unit. If this
alarm occurs, replace the RTC battery at the next available opportu-
nity. After replacing the battery the following actions are required:
- Update the RTC setting
- Update the unit’s software configuration
- Update the operational software
- Update all user selectable function code settings (defrost,
setpoint, etc)
dAL87 RTC Failure An invalid time has been detected. Either the DataCORDER run time
hour and minute have not changed at the start of the hour, or the real
time clock (RTC) time has gained or lost more than 2 minutes in the
hour. This situation may be corrected by cycling the power, setting
the clock or meeting the above criteria for an hour.
dAL88 DataCORDER A write of critical DataCORDER information to the EEPROM
EEPROM Failure has failed.
dAL89 Flash Memory Error An error has been detected in the process of writing daily data to the
non-volatile FLASH memory.
dAL90 Future Expansion This alarm is for future expansion, and is not in use at this time.
dAL91 Alarm List Full The DataCORDER alarm queue is determined to be full
(eight alarms).

4–55 T-340
 SECTION 5
OPERATION

5.1 Inspection (Before Loading)

! WARNING
Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and condenser fans. The unit may cycle the
fans and compress or unexpectedly as control requirements dictate.

1. Check inside for the following:

• Check channels or “T” bar floor for cleanliness. Channels must be free of debris for proper air circulation.
• Check container panels, insulation and door seals for damage. Effect permanent or temporary repairs.
• Visually check that the evaporator fan motor mounting bolts are properly secured (see Section 7.15).
• Check for visible corrosion on the evaporator stator and fan deck (see Section 7.16).
• Check for dirt or grease on evaporator fans or fan deck and clean if necessary.
• Check evaporator coil for cleanliness or obstructions. Wash with fresh water.
• Check defrost drain pans and drain lines for obstructions and clear if necessary. Wash with fresh water.
• Check panels on refrigeration unit for loose bolts and condition of panels. Make sure T.I.R. devices are in
place on access panels.
2. Check condenser coil for cleanliness. Wash with fresh water.
3. Open control box door. Check for loose electrical connections or hardware.
4. Check color of moisture-liquid indicator.

5.2 Connect Power

! WARNING
Do not attempt to remove power plug(s) before turning OFF start-stop switch (ST), unit circuit
breaker(s) and external power source.

! WARNING
Make sure the power plugs are clean and dry before connecting to power receptacle.

5.2.1 Connection To 380 / 460 VAC Power

1. Make sure start-stop switch (ST on control panel) and circuit breaker (CB-1 in the control box) are in position
“0” (OFF).
2. Plug the 460 VAC (yellow) cable into a de-energized 380/460 VAC, 3-phase power source. Energize the
power source. Place circuit breaker (CB-1) in position “I” (ON). Close and secure control box door.
5.2.2 Connection To 190 / 230 VAC Power
An autotransformer (see Figure 5.1) is required to allow operation on nominal 230 volt power. It is fitted with a 230
VAC cable and a receptacle to accept the standard 460 VAC power plug. The 230 volt cable is black in color while
the 460 volt cable is yellow. The transformer may also be equipped with a circuit breaker (CB-2). The transformer is
a step up transformer that will provide 380/460 VAC, 3-phase, 50/60 Hz power to the unit when the 230 VAC power
cable is connected to a 190/230 VAC, 3-phase power source.
1. Make sure that the start-stop switch (ST, on control panel) is in the “0” position (Off).

5–1 T-340
 2. Make sure the circuit breakers CB-1 (in the control box) and CB- 2 (on the transformer) are in position “0”
(OFF).
3. Plug in and lock the 460VACpower plug at the receptacle on the transformer.
4. Plug the 230 VAC (black) cable into a de-energized 190/230 VAC, 3-phase power source and energize the
power source.
5. Set circuit breakers CB-1 and CB-2 to position “I” (ON).
6. Close and secure control box door.

Figure 5.1 Autotransformer

2
3

1) Dual Voltage Modular Autotransformer 3) 460 VAC Power Receptacle

2) Circuit Breaker (CB- 2) 230-Volt
-----

5.3 Adjust Fresh Air Makeup Vent

The purpose of the fresh air makeup vent is to provide ventilation for commodities that require fresh air circulation.
The vent must be closed when transporting frozen foods.
Air exchange depends on static pressure differential, which will vary depending on the container and how the con-
tainer is loaded.
Units may be equipped with a vent position sensor (VPS). The VPS determines the position of the fresh air vent
(upper or lower, as equipped) and sends data to the controller display.

5.3.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent

Two slots and a stop are designed into the Upper Fresh Air disc for air flow adjustments. The first slot allows for a 0
to30%air flow; the second slot allows for a 30 to 100% air flow.
To adjust the percentage of air flow, loosen the wing nut and rotate the disc until the desired percentage of air flow
matches with the arrow. Tighten the wing nut.
To clear the gap between the slots, loosen the wing nut until the disc clears the stop.
See Figure 5.2 for air exchange values for an empty container.
Higher values can be expected for a fully loaded container.

T-340 5–2
 Figure 5.2 Upper Fresh Air Make Up Flow Chart

AIR
FLOW
(CMH) 50HZ
250

TBAR
200 1 1/2”

TBAR
2 5/8”
150 TBAR 3”

100

50

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
PERCENT OPEN

AIR
FLOW
(CMH) 60HZ
300

TBAR
250 1 1/2”

TBAR
200 2 5/8”
TBAR 3”

150

100

50

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
PERCENT OPEN

5.3.2 Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent

a. Full Open or Closed Positions

Maximum air flow is achieved by loosening the wing nuts and moving the cover to the maximum open position
(100% position). The closed position is 0% air flow position. The operator may also adjust the opening to increase
or decrease the air flow volume to meet the required air flow.

b. Reduced Flow for Lower Fresh Air Makeup

NOTE
In order to prevent inaccurate display readings on units equipped with a Vent Position Sensor (VPS),
ensure that the rack and pinion drive of the VPS is not disrupted when adjusting the air makeup vent.

NOTE
Do not loosen the hex nut beyond its stop. Doing so may cause inaccurate display readings and errors in
DataCORDER reports.
Similar to the Upper Fresh Air Makeup vent, two slots and a stop are designed into the Lower Fresh Air slide for air
flow adjustments. The first slot allows for a 0 to 25% air flow; the second slot allows for a 25 to 100% air flow. To
adjust the percentage of air flow, loosen the hex nut and rotate the disc until the desired percentage of air flow
matches with the arrow. Tighten the hex nut. To clear the gap between the slots, loosen the hex nut until the disc
clears the stop.

5–3 T-340
On some models the air slide is supplied with two adjustable air control discs. The fresh air makeup can be
adjusted for 15, 35, 50 or 75 cubic meters per hour (CMH). The air flow has been established at 60 Hz power and
2-1/2 inch T bar and with 15 mm (0.6 inch) H2O external static above free blow.
Loosen the hex nut, adjust each disc to the required air flow, then tighten hex nut.

NOTE
The main air slide is in the fully closed position during reduced air flow operation when equipped with air
control discs.

c. Air Sampling for Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Level

Loosen hex nuts and move the cover until the arrow on the cover is aligned with the “atmosphere sampling port”
label. Tighten the hex nuts and attach a 3/8 in. hose to the sampling port.
If the internal atmosphere content has reached an unacceptable level, the operator may adjust the disc opening to
meet the required air flow volume to ventilate the container.

5.3.3 Vent Position Sensor

The vent position sensor (VPS) allows the user to determine the position of the fresh air vent via Cd45. This func-
tion code is accessible via the CODE SELECT key.
The vent position will display for 30 seconds whenever motion corresponding to 5 CMH (3 CFM) or greater is
detected. It will scroll in intervals of 5 CMH (3 CFM). Scrolling toCd45 will display the Fresh Air Vent Position.
The position of the vent will be recorded in the DataCORDER whenever the unit is running under AC power and
any of the following:
• Trip start
• On every power cycle
• Midnight
• Manual changes greater than 5 CMH (3 CFM) remaining in the new position for at least four minutes

NOTE
The user has four minutes to make necessary adjustments to the vent setting. This time calculation begins
on the initial movement of the sensor. The vent can be moved to any position within the four minutes. On
completion of the first four minutes, the vent is required to remain stable for the next four minutes. If vent
position changes are detected during the four-minute stability period, AL50 will be generated. This provides
the user with the ability to change the vent setting without generating multiple events in the DataCORDER.

5.4 eAutoFresh Operation

Procedures and technical information related to the eAutoFresh™ venting system can be found in the T-342 eAut-
oFresh Manual, located in the Literature section of the Container Refrigeration website. To find the manual from
the Literature section, click on Options > eAutoFresh.
The eAutoFresh system allows the opening and closing of the mechanical air vent slide. The opening and closing
of the slide is determined by the mode selected through Cd43.
The modes of operation are OFF, USER, TEST,DELAY, and GASLIMIT. Each mode of operation has submenus
with selectable parameters. Not all parameters are available in each submenu.
Upon power up, the controller will fully close the eAutoFresh air vent. Nine seconds after power up, the controller
will check if there is a carbon dioxide (CO2) sensor connected.When a CO2 sensor is detected, the controller will
enable access to the Gas Limit mode of operation. If no sensor is detected, the only modes of operation available
will be Test, User, and Delay. The controller will then resume operation in the last mode of operation before power
interruption.

T-340 5–4
5.4.1 eAutoFresh Pre-Trip Inspection
Pre-trip testing of the eAutoFresh system is performed during Pre-Trip test P0. Operation of the system may be
observed during this test.
Upon initiation of Pre-Trip P0, the current state will be saved and the vent will fully close. This will be followed by
two sequences of opening to 100% and returning to the closed position. No other eAutoFresh mode of operation
will be available until the two cycles of opening and closing have completed. Upon termination of the test, the vent
will open to the previous state and operation will return to the previous mode.
If the last mode was gASLM, the vent will open to the preset FLO setting, the controller will start taking new read-
ings and control based on those readings.
5.4.2 eAutoFresh Start-Up Procedure
To start the system, do the following:
1. Press the CODE SELECT key.
2. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until “Cd43” is displayed, then press the ENTER key.
3. Press the Up or Down Arrow key to access the desired mode of operation. When the mode operation is dis-
played press the ENTER key to access the submenu parameters.
5.4.3 eAutoFresh Modes of Operation

NOTE
When setting any mode of operation, complete the entire process to ensure all parameters are set.

a. OFF
A setting of OFF will disable all automatic venting operations. The eAutoFresh vent will be driven fully closed and
the eAutoFresh opening set to 0 CMH in Cd44. This is the default mode whenever a frozen mode of operation has
been selected. When the frozen set point is selected, the current eAutoFresh setting is saved. The vent position
will be restored when a perishable set point is selected.

b. USER
The USER mode provides ventilation for commodities that require fresh air circulation. The flow rate can be
accessed through the submenu if a perishable set point has been selected. To set the flow rate, press the ENTER
key to activate the selection mode. When FLO appears in the left hand window, use the UP or DOWN arrow key to
scroll to the desired opening. The range is from 0 to 220CM (0 to 129CF) in increments of 5. Press the ENTER key
to set the value and begin operation.

c. TEST
TEST mode allows the operator to test the movement of the mechanical slide air vent and calibrate the CO2 sensor.
tESt - When “tESt” appears in the left window, press the ENTER key to begin the test. The eAutoFresh slide will
open fully and then return to the closed position. The test may be observed by the operator to ensure proper opera-
tion of the vent. After completion of the TEST, the unit will return to the previous mode of operation.

NOTE
It is recommended that the calibration procedure only be performed during Pre-trip or when the container
has been fully vented.
CAL will attempt to calibrate the CO2 sensor. When “CAL” is selected the display will flash “CAL”. The operator is
to hold the ENTER key for 5 seconds. The display will stop flashing and read “CAL” for 5 seconds. The micropro-
cessor will read the CO2 value, and then compare that value to a known zero value. If the sensor is within the cali-
bration parameter range, the microprocessor will determine the appropriate offset for the sensor. If the sensor is
outside of this range, for example if the container is loaded or has a high level of CO2, the controller will flash
“NOCAL” for 5 seconds then revert to the previous mode of operation.

5–5 T-340
d. DELAY
In DELAY mode, the operation of the eAutoFresh system will be delayed for a set amount of time. This allows time
for the cargo to reach set point. In DELAY mode, the eAutoFresh vent will open to the stored (FLO) value when the
return air temperature sensor (RTS) is at or below set point plus the return offset value (rtn) or the delay time (tIM),
whichever comes first. The eAutoFresh vent will be fully closed when return air temperature is greater than the set
point plus the offset temperature (rtn).
To set the unit in Delay mode, scroll until “DELAY” appears in the left window, press the ENTER key to activate the
submenu. The first selection is the amount of time (tIM) for the delay. Select the amount of time for the delay by using
the UP and DOWN arrow keys. The range is from 1 to 72 hours in 1 hour increments. Press the ENTER key to set the
value and move to the FLO rate. Use the UP or DOWN arrow key to scroll to the desired FLO rate. The range is from
0 to 220CM (0 to 129CF) in increments of 5 and 3 respectively. Press the ENTER key to set the value and move to
the return temperature offset. Use the UP or DOWN arrow key to scroll to the desired rtn rate. The range of offset is
from 0.6°C to 2.8°C (1.0° F to 2.8° F) in 0.1° increments. Press the ENTER key to set the value and begin operation.

e. GAS LIMIT (gASLM)

In GAS LIMIT mode, access to the submenu is available provided a perishable set point has been selected, and a
valid reading is detected from the CO2 sensor. In “Gas limit” mode the microprocessor will monitor and limit the
level of CO2 in the container by opening and closing the eAutoFresh vent. The vent will open to the (FLO) setting
once the unit has completed initial temperature pull down or if the cargo temperature is within 5°C of set point and
the CO2 level has reached the max limit or if the O2 level has reached the lower limit. After the first 15 minutes of
the vent opening the controller will again evaluate the level of CO2, and/or O2 levels. If after the first 15 minutes the
gas limit values are satisfied, the vent will close, if either gas limit has not been satisfied within 15 minutes the air
exchange vent will open in 10 CMH increments every 15 minutes until both gas concentrations are satisfied. Once
all limits are satisfied the vent will return to the closed position. If conditions are not met with the slide open 100%
for 90 minutes AL29 will be activated.
To operate in GAS LIMIT mode, scroll until gASLM appears in the left window, and press the ENTER key to acti-
vate the submenu. The first selection is the maximum CO2 level (CO2LM). Select the maximum CO2 level by using
the Up and Down Arrow keys. The range is from 0 to 19% in 1% increments. Press ENTER to set the value and
move to the minimum O2 level (O2LM). The range is from 2% to 20% in 1% increments. Press ENTER to set the
value and move to the FLO rate. Use the UP or DOWN arrow key to scroll to the desired FLO rate. The range is
from 0 to 220CM (0 to 129CF) in increments of 5 and 3 respectively. Press ENTER to set the value and begin oper-
ation.
Operational Parameters (Sub Menu Options):
FLO indicates the opening to which the slide will move based on the stored value in CMH (in increments of 5) or
CFM depending on the selection of Cd46 (Airflow display units), Cd28 (Metric/Imperial) or the pressing of the deg
C/F key. CFM is displayed as CF, CMH is displayed as CM.
tIM is the time delay prior to the door opening. The time range is from 1 to 72 hrs in 1 hr increments.
CO2LM is the maximum level of CO2 that is allowed for the cargo. The range is from 0% to 19% in 1% increments,
the default setting is 10.
O2LM is the minimum level of O2 that is allowed for the cargo. The range is from 2% to 20% in 1% increments, the
default setting is 10.
Rtn is an offset value used to expand the return air temperature value to compensate for the fresh air entering the
container. The allowable range is from 0.6°C to 2.8°C or 1.0°F to 5.0°F in 0.1° increments the default setting is
2.8°C (5°F).

5.5 Connect Water-Cooled Condenser

The water-cooled condenser is used when cooling water is available and heating the surrounding air is objection-
able, such as in a ship’s hold. If water-cooled operation is desired, connect in accordance with the following sub-
paragraphs.

5.5.1 Water-Cooled Condenser with Water Pressure Switch

1. Connect the water supply line to the inlet side of condenser and the discharge line to the outlet side of the
condenser (see Figure 3.5).

T-340 5–6
 2. Maintain a flow rate of 11 to 26 liters per minute (3 to 7 gallons per minute). The water pressure switch will
open to de-energize the condenser fan relay. The condenser fan motor will stop and will remain stopped
until the water pressure switch closes.
3. To shift to air-cooled condenser operation, disconnect the water supply and the discharge line to the water-
cooled condenser. The refrigeration unit will shift to air-cooled condenser operation when the water pressure
switch closes.

5.5.2 Water-Cooled Condenser with Condenser Fan Switch

1. Connect the water supply line to the inlet side of condenser and the discharge line to the outlet side of the
condenser (see Figure 3.5.)
2. Maintain a flow rate of 11 to 26 lpm (3 to 7 gpm).
3. Set the condenser fan switch to position “O.” This will de-energize the condenser fan relay. The condenser
fan motor will stop and remain stopped until the CFS switch is set to position “I.”

! CAUTION
When condenser water flow is below 11 lpm (3 gpm) or when water-cooled operation is not in
use, the CFS switch MUST be set to position “1” or the unit will not operate properly.

4. To shift to air-cooled condenser operation, stop the unit, set the CFS switch to positioI” and restart the unit.
Disconnect the water lines to the water-cooled condenser.

5.6 Connect Remote Monitoring Receptacle

If remote monitoring is required, connect the remote monitor plug at the unit receptacle, see item 9, Figure 3.6.
When the remote monitor plug is connected to the remote monitoring receptacle, the following remote circuits are
energized:

Circuit Function
Sockets B to A Energizes remote cool light
Sockets C to A Energizes remote defrost light
Sockets D to A Energizes remote in-range light

5.7 Starting and Stopping Instructions

! WARNING
Make sure that the unit circuit breaker(s) (CB-1 & CB-2) and the START-STOP switch (ST) are in
the “O” (OFF) position before connecting to any electrical power source.

NOTE
The electronic phase detection system will check for proper compressor rotation within the first 30 seconds.
If rotation is not correct, the compressor will be stopped and restarted in the opposite direction. If the com-
pressor is producing unusually loud and continuous noise after the first 30 seconds of operation, stop the
unit and investigate.

5.7.1 Starting the Unit

1. With power properly applied, the fresh air vent set and (if required) the water-cooled condenser connected
(See Section 5.2, Section 5.3 & Section 5.5), place the START-STOP switch to “I” (ON).
2. The Controller Function Codes for the container ID (Cd40), software version (Cd18) and unit model number
(Cd20) will be displayed in sequence.
3. Continue with Start Up Inspection (see Section 5.8).

5–7 T-340
5.7.2 Stopping the Unit
1. To stop the unit, place the START-STOP switch in position “0” (OFF).

5.8 Start-Up Inspection

5.8.1 Physical Inspection
Check rotation of condenser and evaporator fans.

5.8.2 Check Controller Function Codes

Check, and if required, reset controller Function Codes (Cd27 through Cd39) in accordance with desired operating
parameters. See Table 4–5, Controller Function Codes.

5.8.3 Start Temperature Recorder

Partlow Recorders
1. Open recorder door and check battery of electronic recorder. Be sure key is returned to storage clip of
mechanical recorder.
2. Lift stylus (pen) by pulling the marking tip outward until the stylus arm snaps into the retracted position.
3. Install new chart, making sure chart is under the four corner tabs. Lower the stylus until it has made contact
with the chart. Close and secure the recorder door.

DataCORDER
1. Check and, if required, set the DataCORDER Configuration in accordance with desired recording parameter
(see Section 4.8.3).
2. Enter a “Trip Start.” To enter a “Trip Start,” do the following:
a. Press the ALT MODE key. When the left display shows “dC”, Press the ENTER key.
b. Scroll to Code dC30.
c. Press and hold the ENTER key for five seconds.
d. The “Trip Start” event will be entered in the DataCORDER.

5.8.4 Complete Inspection

Allow the unit to run for five minutes to stabilize conditions, and then perform a Pre-trip diagnosis in accordance
with Section 5.9.

5.9 Pre-Trip Diagnosis

! CAUTION
Pre-trip inspection should not be performed with critical temperature cargoes in the container.

! CAUTION
When PRE-TRIP key is pressed, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode will be deactivated. At
the completion of Pre- trip activity, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated.

Pre-trip diagnosis provides automatic testing of the unit components using internal measurements and comparison
logic. The program will provide a “PASS” or “FAIL” display to indicate test results.
The testing begins with access to a Pre-trip selection menu. The user may have the option of selecting one of two
automatic tests.
These tests will automatically perform a series of individual Pre-trip tests. The user may also scroll down to select
any of the individual tests.

T-340 5–8
When only the short sequence is configured, it will appear as “AUtO” in the display. Otherwise “AUtO1” will indicate
the short sequence and “AUtO2” will indicate the long sequence. The test short sequence will run tests P0 through
P6. The long test sequence will run tests P0 through P10.
A detailed description of the Pre-trip test codes is listed in Table 4–7. If no selection is made, the Pre-trip menu
selection process will terminate automatically. However, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated man-
ually if required.
Scrolling down to the “rSLts” code and pressing ENTER will allow the user to scroll through the results of the last
Pre-trip testing run. If no Pre-testing has been run (or an individual test has not been run) since the unit was pow-
ered up, “- - - -” will be displayed.

NOTE
Pre-trip may also be initiated via communications. The operation is the same as for the keypad initiation
described below except that should a test fail, the Pre-trip mode will automatically terminate. When initiated
via communications, a Pre-trip test may not be interrupted with an arrow key, but the Pre- trip test can be
terminated with the PRE-TRIP key.

5.9.1 Prior to Starting a Pre-Trip

Verify the following conditions prior to starting a pre-trip.
• Unit voltage (Cd07) is within tolerance.
• Unit amperage draw (Cd04, Cd05, Cd06) are within expected limits.
• All alarms are cleared and rectified.

5.9.2 Starting a Pre-Trip

1. Press the PRE-TRIP key to accesses the pre-trip test selection menu.
2. To Run an Automatic Test: Scroll through the selections by pressing the Up or Down Arrow keys to display
AUTO, AUTO 1, AUTO 2 or AUTO 3 as desired, then press the ENTER key.
• The unit will execute the series of tests without any need for direct user interface. These tests vary in
length, depending on the component under test.
• While tests are running, “P#-#” will appear on the left display; the #’s indicate the test number and sub-
test. The right display will show a countdown time in minutes and seconds, indicating the amount of time
remaining in the test.

When an Auto 1 Pre-trip test runs to completion without a failure, the unit will exit Pre-trip
mode and return to normal control operation. However, dehumidification and bulb mode must
be reactivated manually if required.

! CAUTION
When Pre-trip test Auto2 runs to completion without being interrupted, the unit will terminate
Pre-trip and display “Auto 2” “end.” The unit will suspend operation until the user presses the
ENTER key!
3. When an automatic test fails, it will be repeated once. A repeated test failure will cause “FAIL” to be shown
on the right display, with the corresponding test number to the left. Press the Down Arrow key to repeat the
test, the Up Arrow key to skip to the next test, or the PRE-TRIP key to terminate testing. The unit will wait
indefinitely or until a command is entered.

! CAUTION
When a failure occurs during automatic testing, the unit will suspend operation awaiting oper-
ator intervention.
4. To Run an Individual Test: Scroll through the selections by pressing the Up or Down Arrow keys to display
an individual test code. Press the ENTER key when the desired test code is displayed.

5–9 T-340
 • Individually selected tests, other than the LED / Display test, will perform the operations necessary to ver-
ify the operation of the component. At the conclusion, “PASS” or “FAIL” will be displayed. This message
will remain displayed for up to three minutes, during which time a user may select another test. If the
three minute time period expires, the unit will terminate pre-trip and return to control mode operation.
• While the tests are being executed, the user may terminate the pre-trip diagnostics by pressing and hold-
ing the PRE-TRIP key. The unit will then resume normal operation. If the user decides to terminate a test
but remain at the test selection menu, the user may press the Up Arrow key. When this is done, all test
outputs will be de-energized and the test selection menu will be displayed.
• Throughout the duration of any Pre-trip test (except during P-7 high pressure switch tests) the current
limiting and pressure limiting are both active. The current limiting process is only active for P-7.

5.9.3 Displaying Pre-Trip Test Results

1. Press the PRE-TRIP key to access the Pre-trip test selection menu. “SELCt Prtrp” will be displayed.
2. Press the Arrow keys until the message “P,” “rSLts” (Pre-trip results) is displayed.
3. Press the ENTER key. The results for all Pre-trip sub tests are available from this menu (1-0, 1-1, etc).
The results will be displayed as “PASS” or “FAIL” for all the tests run to completion since power up. If a
test has not been run since power up, “- - - - -” will be displayed.
Once all Pre-test activity is completed, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated manually if
required.

5.10 Probe Diagnostics

A complete temperature probe check is performed during the P5 Pre-trip test. A probe check is also run at the end
of a defrost cycle; the defrost light will remain on during this period. If supply probes are within limits and return
probes are within limits, the unit will return to normal operation. During normal operation, the controller continu-
ously monitors and compares adjacent temperature probe readings.
The probe check procedure consists of running the evaporator fans for up to eight minutes in order to compare the
readings from the adjacent temperature probes. If a significant difference in temperature readings is detected
between probes, a defrost cycle, followed by another probe check may be initiated. Any continued disagreement
between probes will prompt the controller to invalidate the failed temperature probe, and the backup probe will be
used for temperature control.
In Perishable Mode, both pairs of supply and return probes are monitored for probe disagreement. Probe disagreement
is considered a difference of 0.5°C (0.9°F) or greater between the supply air sensors and/ or a difference of 2.0°C
(3.6°F) between the return air sensors. Probe disagreement found in either pair can trigger a defrost probe check.
In Frozen Mode, only the controlling probes are considered. Disagreement of the controlling probes can trigger a
defrost probe check, which will occur when the difference between the sensors is greater than 2.0°C (3.6°F). Nor-
mally, the controlling probes are the return probes but if both return probes are invalidated, the supply probes are
used for control purposes. Probe disagreement of the non- controlling probe pair will not trigger a defrost probe
check.
If after the defrost probe check the supply probes agree and return probes agree, all supply and return sensors are
considered valid and the unit returns to normal control.
In the Case of Probe Disagreement:
If the supply probes disagree and the return probes agree, the controller will invalidate the worst supply probe. If the
probe check is run as part of Pre-trip P-5, an alarm will be triggered for the invalidated probe. If it is a run time defrost
probe check, the invalidated probe will be passed over and no alarm will be triggered. However, if the best supply
probe is greater than 1.2°C (2.2°F) difference with respect to its return probes, the best supply probe is also invali-
dated. If unit is in Perishable Mode, a probe alarm will be triggered for both supply probes.
If the supply probes agree and the return probes disagree, invalidate the worst return probe. If the probe check is
being run as part of Pre-trip P-5, an alarm will be triggered for the invalidated probe. If it is a run time defrost probe
check, the invalidated probe will be passed over and no alarm will be necessary. If the best return probe is greater
than 1.2°C (2.2°F) difference with respect to its supply probes, then the best return probe is also invalidated. If the
unit is in perishable mode, a probe alarm will be triggered for both return probes.

T-340 5–10
5.11 Emergency Bypass Operation
Emergency Bypass operation is used to override the controller, in the case of a controller malfunction, to keep the unit
cooling. When Emergency Bypass is installed and turned on, the unit will remain in a continuous state of full cool until
the Emergency Bypass switch is turned off.
To place the unit in the Emergency Bypass Operation:
1. Locate the connection diagram and connectors for the emergency bypass (EB) sensors behind the top left
side of the compressor.
2. Disconnect the emergency bypass connector from the controller connector and attach it to the emergency
bypass module connector (see Figure 5.3).
3. Locate the wire tire located at the EB switch in the control box.
4. Cut the wire tie, then place the EB switch in the On position.
5. Place the Mode Switch (MS) in the Full Cool position to enable the system for cooling.
6. Manually control container air temperature by cycling the Mode switch between Full Cool and evaporator
Fans Only.
To operate the fans only, the MODE switch must be in the FANS ONLY position and the EMERGENCY BYPASS
switch must be in the Bypass position.
The EBS module uses the system’s safety devices (high pressure switch, motor internal protectors, and heat termi-
nation thermostat) to protect the system while in Emergency Bypass Mode.

! CAUTION
The unit will remain in the full cooling mode as long as the EB switch is in the On position and
the Mode Switch is in the Full Cool position. If the cargo can be damaged by low temperatures,
the operator must monitor container temperature and manually cycle operation as required to
maintain temperature within required limits.
When the Emergency Bypass switch is in the Bypass position, the EBS will be enabled.
With the Mode switch in Full Cool mode, the following will occur simultaneously:
a. The EBS switch will enable EBS input.
b. The phase detection circuit will detect the phase rotation and close to provide power to the compressor con-
tactor.
c. The condenser fan contact will close to energize the condenser contactor and provide power to the con-
denser fan motor.
d. The evaporator fan contact will close to energize the high speed evaporator contactor and provide power to
the evaporator fan motor.
e. The EBS electronic module will operate the EEV to control superheat.
To return the unit to normal operation:
1. Locate the connectors behind the compressor.
2. Disconnect the Emergency Bypass connector from the EBS module connector and reconnect it to the con-
troller connector (see Figure 5.3).
3. Inside the control box, place the EB switch in the Off position.
4. Re-install the wire tie at the switch mounting.

5–11 T-340
 Figure 5.3 Diagram of Emergency Bypass Connections

EMERGENCY BYPASS
CONNECTOR

72 72
6(16256 &21752//(5

',$*5$06+2:6
&211(&7,21)25
(0(5*(1&<%<3$66
23(5$7,21
72%<3$66
02'8/(

5.12 Automatic Cold Treatment (Option)

Cold Treatment has been employed as an effective post-harvest method for the control of Mediterranean and certain
other tropical fruit flies. Exposing infested fruit to temperatures of 2.2°C (3.6°F) or below for specific time periods
results in the mortality of various life stages for this group of insects.
Automated Cold Treatment (ACT) in the Carrier Transicold unit is a method to simplify the task of completing cold
treatment by automating the process of changing the setpoints. ACT is set up through function code Cd51. Refer to
Function Code table in this manual for Cd51 menu processing and displays.

NOTE
ACT, setup with Cd51, and Automatic Setpoint Change (ASC), setup with Cd53, will not work simultane-
ously. Setting one will deactivate the other.

Procedure to Set ACT:

1. Enter the required cargo setpoint. It must be lower than the treatment temperature discussed in step 5.
2. Press the CODE SELECT key.
3. Use the Arrow keys to scroll to Cd51, and then press the ENTER key.
4. "ACt" is now displayed in the left display and the right will display "Off". Use the Arrow keys to bring up "On"
in the right display and press the ENTER key.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

5. “trEAt" is now displayed in the left display and the right will be flashing the last setting (shown as XX.X°C).
Use the Arrow keys to select the desired cold treatment setpoint and press the ENTER key.

T-340 5–12
 NOTE
"trEAt" is the maximum value that the USDA probes need to remain below, to pass the Cold Treatment pro-
tocol. For instance, if the treat value is set at 35.0°F (1.7°C) then the USDA probe temperatures must
remain below 35.0°F (1.7°C) to pass.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

6. "dAyS" is now displayed in the left display and the right will be flashing. Use the Arrow keys to select the
desired days for cold treatment and press the ENTER key.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

7. "ProbE" is now displayed in the left display and the right will display the probe numbers that are connected.
Press the ENTER key. For instance, if "1234" is displayed, then all four of the probes are connected.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

8. "SPnEW" is now displayed in the left display and the right will be flashing. Use the Arrow keys to select the
desired setpoint after the cold treatment process has successfully completed and press the ENTER key.
This would be the final temperature prior to the delivery of the cargo.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

9. Cd51 is now displayed in the left display and the right will display days / hours remaining in cold treatment.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

10. The unit will start to countdown once all detected USDA probes have reached the specified cold treatment
temperature. The cold treatment process will continue until the specified number of days is reached. During
operation, Cd51 will show the number of days and hours remaining in the cold treatment.

NOTE
Once the cold treatment process has been initiated, setpoint change via the keypad is disabled.
11. While the unit is operating in ACT mode, the left hand display will alternate between "COLd" and setpoint.
The right hand display will alternate between "trEAt" and the cargo temperature. Once the treatment time
has been completed, the setpoint temperature will increase to the "SPnEW" setting chosen in step 8.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

5–13 T-340
 12. When the cold treatment process is complete, the "SPnEW" setpoint will be displayed in the left hand dis-
play and cargo temperature in the right hand display, alternating with "COLd" "Done". "COLd" "Done" will
continue to alternate with the setpoint and cargo temperature until ACT is turned off.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

Procedure to Turn ACT OFF:

ACT will be automatically turned off with a TripStart, or if a Pretrip is initiated.
1. To manually turn ACT Off, press the CODE SELECT key.
2. Use the Arrow keys to scroll to Cd51, and then press the ENTER key.
3. Use the Arrow keys to bring up "Off" in the right display and press the ENTER key.

5.13 Automatic Setpoint Change (ASC)

Automatic Setpoint Change (ASC) allows up to 6 setpoint changes to be pre-programmed over defined periods of
time using Cd53.
1. Press the CODE SELECT key.
2. Use the Arrow keys to scroll to Cd53, then press the ENTER key.
3. Use the Arrow keys to scroll to ON, then press the ENTER key. If ASC is already ON, selecting OFF will ter-
minate ASC.
4. Select the desired number of setpoint changes (nSC) by scrolling through the available “flashing” options (1-
6) in the right display, then press the ENTER key.
5. Select the initial setpoint: With (SP 0) in the left display, select by scrolling to the desired “flashing” setpoint
in the right display and press ENTER.
6. Select the days desired for initial setpoint (SP 0): With (DAY 0) in the left display, select by scrolling to the
desired “flashing” days (1 to 99) in the right display and press ENTER.
7. Select the next setpoint (SP 1): With (SP 1) in the left display, select by scrolling to the desired “flashing” set-
point in the right display and press ENTER.
8. Continue to select each additional setpoint.
9. Select a final setpoint (SP x): With (SP x) in the left display, select by scrolling to the desired “flashing” set-
point in the right display and press ENTER.

While the unit is operating in ASC mode, the left hand display will alternate between current unit setpoint and
“ASC”. The right hand display will alternate between current control temperature and “ACtvE”. The user can deter-
mine the amount of time left at the current setpoint by selecting Cd53. The amount of time left will be displayed in
the right display (XX (days) / XX (hours). By sequentially pressing ENTER, set parameters can be viewed.
At completion of ASC mode, the left hand display will alternate between current unit setpoint “ASC”. The right hand
display will alternate between current control temperature and “Done”.
The display will remain this way until ASC is turned off. The user can determine the date of completion by selecting
Cd53. With (done) in the left display, the date of completion will be displayed in the right display (Month / Day).
ASC can be manually turned off by selecting Cd53, scrolling to “Off” and pressing the ENTER key.
ACS will be automatically turned off after three days without power, or if a Pre-trip is initiated.
ACS (Cd53) will work independently of Automatic Cold Treatment (ACT) (Cd51). Setting one will deactivate the
other.

T-340 5–14
 SECTION 6
TROUBLESHOOTING

Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference

6.1 Unit Will Not Start Or Starts Then Stops
External power source OFF Turn on
Start-Stop switch OFF or defective Check
No power to unit
Circuit breaker tripped or OFF Check
Autotransformer not connected Section 5.2.2
Circuit breaker OFF or defective Check
Control transformer defective Replace
Loss of control power
Fuse (F3A/F3B) blown Check
Start-Stop switch OFF or defective Check
Evaporator fan motor internal protector open Section 7.15
Condenser fan motor internal protector open Section 7.11
Compressor internal protector open Section 7.8
Component(s) not operating
High pressure switch open Section 6.7
Heat termination thermostat open Replace
Malfunction of current sensor Replace
Low line voltage Check
Compressor hums, but does Single phasing Check
not start Shorted or grounded motor windings Section 7.8
Compressor seized Section 7.8
6.2 Unit Operates Long Or Continuously In Cooling
Hot load Normal
Container
Defective box insulation or air leak Repair
Shortage of refrigerant Section 7.3
Evaporator coil covered with ice Section 6.6
Evaporator coil plugged with debris Section 7.16
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards Section 7.14 / Section 7.15
Air bypass around evaporator coil Check
Controller set too low Reset
Compressor service valves or liquid line shutoff valve Open valves completely
Refrigeration system
partially closed
Dirty condenser Section 7.10
Compressor worn Section 7.8
Current limit (function code Cd32) set to wrong value Section 4.4.3
Economizer solenoid valve malfunction Section 7.21
Digital unloader valve stuck open Replace
Electronic expansion valve Replace

6–1 T-340
Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
6.3 Unit Runs But Has Insufficient Cooling
Abnormal pressures Section 6.7
Abnormal temperatures Section 6.16
Abnormal currents Section 6.17
Controller malfunction Section 6.9
Evaporator fan or motor defective Section 7.15
Refrigeration system
Compressor service valves or liquid line shutoff valve Open valves completely
partially closed
Frost on coil Section 6.10
Digital unloader valve stuck open Replace
Electronic expansion valve Replace
6.4 Unit Will Not Heat Or Has Insufficient Heating
Start-Stop switch OFF or defective Check
No operation of any kind Circuit breaker OFF or defective Check
External power source OFF Turn ON
Circuit breaker or fuse defective Replace
Control Transformer defective Replace
No control power Evaporator fan internal motor protector open Section 7.15
Heat relay defective Check
Heater termination thermostat open Section 7.14
Heater(s) defective Section 7.14
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Evaporator fan motor(s) defective or rotating back- Section 7.14 / Section 7.15
wards
Unit will not heat or has Evaporator fan motor contactor defective Replace
insufficient heat
Controller malfunction Section 6.9
Defective wiring Replace
Loose terminal connections Tighten
Low line voltage Section 3.3
6.5 Unit Will Not Terminate Heating
Controller improperly set Reset
Controller malfunction Section 6.9
Unit fails to stop heating
Heater termination thermostat remains closed along Section 7.14
with the heat relay
6.6 Unit Will Not Defrost Properly
Defrost timer malfunction (Cd27) Table 4–5
Loose terminal connections Tighten
Will not initiate defrost Defective wiring Replace
automatically Defrost temperature sensor defective or heat termi- Replace
nation thermostat open
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace

T-340 6–2
Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
Manual defrost switch defective Replace
Will not initiate defrost
Keypad is defective Replace
manually
Defrost temperature sensor open Replace
Initiates but relay (DR) Low line voltage Section 3.3
drops out
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Initiates but does not defrost
Heater(s) burned out Section 7.14
Frequent defrost Wet load Normal
6.7 Abnormal Pressures
Condenser coil dirty Section 7.10
Condenser fan rotating backwards Section 7.11
Condenser fan inoperative Section 7.11
High discharge pressure
Refrigerant overcharge or non-condensibles Section 7.3
Discharge service valve partially closed Open
Electronic expansion valve (EEV) control malfunction Replace
Incorrect software and / or controller configuration Check
Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evapora- Replace
tor pressure transducer (EPT)
Suction service valve partially closed Open
Filter drier partially plugged Section 7.13
Low suction pressure Low refrigerant charge Section 7.3
No evaporator air flow or restricted air flow Section 7.3
Excessive frost on evaporator coil Section 6.6
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards Section 7.15.3
Electronic expansion valve (EEV) control malfunction Replace
Failed digital unloader valve (DUV) Replace
Compressor operating in reverse Section 6.15
Suction and discharge
pressures tend to equalize Compressor cycling / stopped Check
when unit is operating Failed digital unloader valve (DUV) Replace
6.8 Abnormal Noise or Vibrations
Compressor start up after an extended shutdown
Normal
Brief chattering when manually shut down
Compressor operating in reverse Section 6.15
Compressor
Loose mounting bolts or worn resilient mounts Tighten / Replace
Loose upper mounting Section 7.8.1
Liquid slugging Section 7.14
Bent, loose or striking venturi Check
Condenser or Evaporator Fan Worn motor bearings Section 7.11 / Section 7.15
Bent motor shaft Section 7.11 / Section 7.15

6–3 T-340
Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
6.9 Microprocessor Malfunction
Incorrect software and / or controller configuration Check
Defective sensor Section 7.24
Will not control
Defective wiring Check
Low refrigerant charge Section 7.3
6.10 No Evaporator Air Flow Or Restricted Air Flow
Frost on coil Section 6.6
Evaporator coil blocked
Dirty coil Section 7.14
Evaporator fan motor internal protector open Section 7.15
No or partial evaporator Evaporator fan motor(s) defective Section 7.15
air flow Evaporator fan(s) loose or defective Section 7.15
Evaporator fan contactor defective Replace
6.11 eAutoFresh Not Operating
Unit not configured for eAutoFresh Operation No action
Cd43 in OFF mode Section 5.4.2
Wiring disconnected Check wiring
Vent not opening
Stepper drive defective Section 7.27.2
Stepper motor defective Section 7.27.4
Unit operating in frozen mode Section 5.4.3
Check CO2 sensor Section 5.4.3
Gas Limit mode unavailable Wiring disconnected Check wiring
Unit operating in frozen mode Section 5.4.3
ENTER Key not held for sufficient length of time Section 5.4.3
Unable to calibrate
CO2 outside of acceptable levels Check
CO2 sensor
Check CO2 sensor Section 5.4.3
Unit not configured for eAutoFresh Operation No action
Code 44 displays “- - - - - “
Check CO2 sensor Section 5.4.3
6.12 Electronic Expansion Valve Malfunction
Incorrect software and / or controller configuration Check
Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evapora- Replace
tor pressure transducer (EPT)
Suction service valve partially closed Open
Filter drier partially plugged Section 7.13
Low refrigerant charge Section 7.3
Low suction pressure
No evaporator air flow or restricted air flow Section 7.14
Excessive frost on evaporator coil Section 6.6
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards Section 7.15.3
Electronic expansion valve (EEV) control malfunction Section 7.17
Failed digital unloader valve (DUV) Section 6.6
Loose or insufficiently clamped sensor Replace

T-340 6–4
Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
Foreign material in valve Section 7.17
Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evapora- Replace
High suction pressure with tor pressure transducer (EPT)
low superheat Electronic expansion valve (EEV) control malfunction Replace
Improperly seated powerhead Ensure powerhead is
locked and in place
Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evapora- Replace
Liquid slugging in compressor tor pressure transducer (EPT)
Failed electronic expansion valve (EEV) Replace
6.13 Autotransformer Malfunction
Circuit breaker (CB-1 or CB-2) tripped Check
Autotransformer defective Section 7.22
Unit will not start
Power source not turned ON Check
460 VAC power plug is not inserted into the receptacle Section 5.2.1
6.14 Water-Cooled Condenser Or Water Pressure Switch
Dirty coil
High discharge pressure Section 7.12
Non-condensibles
Condenser fan Water pressure switch malfunction Check
starts and stops Water supply interruption Check
6.15 Compressor Operating in Reverse
NOTE
The compressor may start in reverse for up to 10 seconds to determine correct phase rotation if
required for phase detection.

! CAUTION
Allowing the scroll compressor to operate in reverse for more than two minutes will result in
internal compressor damage. Turn the start- stop switch OFF immediately.
Incorrect wiring of compressor
Electrical Incorrect wiring of compressor contactor(s) Check
Incorrect wiring of current sensor

6–5 T-340
Condition Possible Cause Remedy / Reference
6.16 Abnormal Temperatures
Condenser coil dirty Section 7.10
Condenser fan rotating backwards Section 7.11
Condenser fan inoperative Section 7.11
Refrigerant overcharge or non-condensibles Section 7.3
Discharge service valve partially closed Open
Electronic expansion valve (EEV) control malfunction Replace
High discharge temperature Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evapora- Replace
tor pressure transducer (EPT)
Discharge temperature sensor drifting high Replace
Failed economizer expansion valve (EXV), econo- Replace
mizer coil, or economizer solenoid valve (ESV)
Plugged economizer expansion valve (EXV), econo- Replace
mizer coil, or economizer solenoid valve (ESV)
Loose or insufficiently clamped sensor Replace
6.17 Abnormal Currents
Unit reads abnormal currents Current sensor wiring Check

T-340 6–6
 SECTION 7
SERVICE

NOTE
Use a refrigerant recovery system whenever removing refrigerant.When working with refrigerants you must
comply with all local government environmental laws. In the U.S.A., refer to EPA section 608.

! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD: Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage. Never use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak
testing or operating the product. Charge only with R-134a: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI
Standard 700 specification.

NOTE
Annual maintenance procedures for PrimeLINE units 69NT40-561 can be found in the 62-10327 Annual Main-
tenance Manual, located in the Literature section of the Container Refrigeration website. To find the manual
from the Literature section, click on Container Units > All Container Units > Operation.

7.1 Section Layout

Service procedures are provided herein beginning with refrigeration system service, then refrigeration system com-
ponent service, electrical system service, temperature recorder service and general service. Refer to the Table of
Contents to locate specific topics.

7.2 Manifold Gauge Set

The manifold gauge set (see Figure 7.1) is used to determine system operating pressure, add refrigerant charge,
and to equalize or evacuate the system.

Figure 7.1 Manifold Gauge Set

2 3

1
4

7 6 5

1) Discharge Pressure Valve (shown 5) Low Side Connection

backseated) 6) Utility Connection to:
2) Discharge Pressure Gauge a. Refrigerant Cylinder
3) Suction Pressure Gauge b. Vacuum Pump
4) Suction Pressure Valve (shown c. Oil Container
frontseated) 7) High Side Connection
-----

7–1 T-340
When the Suction Pressure Valve is frontseated (turned all the way in), the suction (low) pressure can be checked
at the Suction Pressure Gauge.
When the Discharge Pressure Valve is frontseated, the discharge (high) pressure can be checked at the Discharge
Pressure Gauge.
When both valves are backseated (all the way out), high pressure vapor will flow into the low side.
When the Suction Pressure Valve is open and the Discharge Pressure Valve shut, the system can be charged
through the Utility Connection. Oil can also be added to the system.
A R-134a manifold gauge/hose set with self-sealing hoses (see Figure 7.2) is required for service of the models
covered within this manual. The manifold gauge/hose set is available from Carrier Transicold. (Carrier Transicold
part number 07-00294-00, which includes items 1 through 6, Figure 7.2.)
If the manifold gauge/hose set is new or was exposed to the atmosphere, it will need to be evacuated to remove
contaminants and air as follows:
1. Backseat (turn counterclockwise) both field service couplings (see Figure 7.2) and midseat both hand
valves.
2. Connect the yellow hose to a vacuum pump and refrigerant 134a cylinder.
Figure 7.2 R-134a Manifold Gauge/Hose Set

To Low Side To High Side

Access Valve Access Valve

6 2
1

3
4
7 4 5
2

1) RED Refrigeration and/or Evacuation 5) High Side Field Service Coupling (Red
Hose (SAE J2196/R-134a) Knob)
2) Hose Fitting (0.5-16 Acme) 6) BLUE Refrigeration and / or Evacuation
3) YELLOW Refrigeration and / or Hose (SAE J2196/R-134a)
Evacuation Hose (SAE J2196/R-134a) 7) Low Side Field Service Coupling (Blue
4) Hose Fitting with O-ring (M14 x 1.5) Knob)
-----

3. Evacuate to 10 inches of vacuum and then charge with R-134a to a slightly positive pressure of 0.1 kg/ cm2
(1.0 psig).
4. Frontseat both manifold gauge set valves and disconnect from cylinder. The gauge set is now ready for use.

7.3 Service Connections

The compressor suction, compressor discharge, and the liquid line service valves (see Figure 7.3) are provided with
a double seat and an access valve which enables servicing of the compressor and refrigerant lines.
Turning the valve stem clockwise (all the way forward) will frontseat the valve to close off the line connection and
open a path to the access valve. Turning the stem counterclockwise (all the way out) will backseat the valve to
open the line connection and close off the path to the access valve.

T-340 7–2
With the valve stem midway between frontseat and backseat, both of the service valve connections are open to the
access valve path.
For example, the valve stem is first fully backseated when connecting a manifold gauge to measure pressure.
Then, the valve is opened 1/4 to 1/2 turn to measure the pressure.

Figure 7.3 Service Valve

2
3
1

6 4 7
5

1) Line Connection 5) Compressor Or Filter Drier Inlet Connection

2) Access Valve 6) Valve (Frontseated)
3) Stem Cap 7) Valve (Backseated)
4) Valve stem
-----
Connection of the manifold gauge/hose set (see Figure 7.4) is dependent on the component being serviced. If only
the compressor is being serviced, the high side coupling is connected to the discharge service valve.
For service of the low side (after pump down), the high side coupling is connected to the liquid line service valve.
The center hose connection is brought to the tool being used (vacuum, tank, etc.).

7.3.1 Connecting the Manifold Gauge Set

1. Remove service valve stem cap and to make sure the valve is backseated.
2. Remove access valve cap (see Figure 7.3).
3. Connect the field service coupling (see Figure 7.2) to the access valve.
4. Turn the field service coupling knob clockwise, which will open the system to the gauge set.
5. To read system pressures, slightly midseat the service valve.
6. Repeat the procedure to connect the other side of the gauge set.

! CAUTION
To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in the manifold gauge set be sure set is brought to suc-
tion pressure before disconnecting.

7.3.2 Removing the Manifold Gauge Set:

1. While the compressor is still ON, backseat the high side service valve.
2. Midseat both hand valves on the manifold gauge set and allow the pressure in the manifold gauge set to be
drawn down to low side pressure. This returns any liquid that may be in the high side hose to the system.
3. Backseat the low side service valve. Backseat both field service couplings and frontseat both manifold hand
valves. Remove couplings from access valves.
4. Install both service valve stem caps and service port caps (finger-tight only).

7–3 T-340
7.4 Pump Down the Unit
To service the filter drier, economizer, expansion valves, economizer solenoid valve, digital unloader valve or evap-
orator coil, pump the refrigerant into the high side as follows:

! CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low suction pressure very quickly. Do not use the compressor
to evacuate the system below 0 psig. Never operate the compressor with the suction or dis-
charge service valves closed (frontseated). Internal damage will result from operating the com-
pressor in a deep vacuum.
1. Attach manifold gauge set to the compressor suction and discharge service valves (see Section 7.2).
2. Start the unit and run in the frozen mode (controller set below -10°C (14°F) for 10 to 15 minutes.
3. Check function code Cd21 (see Section 4.2.2). The economizer solenoid valve should be open. If not, con-
tinue to run until the valve opens.
4. Frontseat the liquid line service valve. Place Start-Stop switch in the OFF position when the suction reaches
a positive pressure of 0.1 bar (1.4 psig).
5. Frontseat the suction and discharge service valves. The refrigerant will be trapped between the compressor
discharge service valves and the liquid line valve.
6. Before opening up any part of the system, a slight positive pressure should be indicated on the pressure
gauge. Remove power from the unit before opening any part of the system. If a vacuum is indicated, emit
refrigerant by cracking the liquid line valve momentarily to build up a slight positive pressure.
7. When opening up the refrigerant system, certain parts may frost. Allow the part to warm to ambient tempera-
ture before dismantling. This avoids internal condensation which puts moisture in the system.
8. After repairs have been made, be sure to perform a refrigerant leak check (see Section 7.5), and evacuate
and dehydrate the low side (see Section 7.6.1).
9. Check refrigerant charge (see Section 7.7.1).

7.5 Refrigerant Leak Checking

! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage.
Never use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak testing or operating the product.
Charge only with R-134a: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI Standard 700 specification.
1. The recommended procedure for finding leaks in a system is with a R-134a electronic leak detector. Testing
joints with soapsuds is satisfactory only for locating large leaks.
2. If the system is without refrigerant, charge the system with refrigerant 134a to build up pressure between2.1
to 3.5 bar (30.5 to 50.8 psig). To ensure complete pressurization of the system, refrigerant should be
charged at the compressor suction valve and the liquid line service valve. Remove refrigerant cylinder and
leak-check all connections.

NOTE
Only refrigerant 134a should be used to pressurize the system. Any other gas or vapor will contaminate the
system, which will require additional purging and evacuation of the system.
3. If required, remove refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery system and repair any leaks. Check for leaks.
4. Evacuate and dehydrate the unit (see Section 7.6.1.)
5. Charge unit (see Section 7.7.1).

T-340 7–4
7.6 Evacuation and Dehydration
7.6.1 General
Moisture is detrimental to refrigeration systems. The presence of moisture in a refrigeration system can have many
undesirable effects. The most common are copper plating, acid sludge formation, “freezing-up” of metering devices
by free water, and formation of acids, resulting in metal corrosion.

7.6.2 Preparation
1. Evacuate and dehydrate only after pressure leak test (see Section 7.5).
2. Essential tools to properly evacuate and dehydrate any system include a vacuum pump (8m3/hr = 5 cfm vol-
ume displacement) and an electronic vacuum gauge. The pump is available from Carrier Transicold, P/N
07-00176-11. The micron gauge is P/N 07- 00414- 00.
3. If possible, keep the ambient temperature above 15.6°C (60°F) to speed evaporation of moisture. If the
ambient temperature is lower than 15.6°C (60°F), ice might form before moisture removal is complete. Heat
lamps or alternate sources of heat may be used to raise the system temperature.
4. Additional time may be saved during a complete system pump down by replacing the filter drier with a sec-
tion of copper tubing and the appropriate fittings. Installation of a new drier may be performed during the
charging procedure.

Figure 7.4 Refrigeration System Service Connections

2 3
4

5
1

S D
8
10

9 7 6

1) Liquid Service Connection 6) Vacuum Pump

2) Receiver or Water Cooled Condenser 7) Electronic Vacuum Gauge
3) Compressor 8) Manifold Gauge Set
4) Discharge Service Connection 9) Refrigerant Cylinder
5) Suction Service Connection 10) Reclaimer
-----

7.6.3 Evacuate and Dehydrate - Complete System

NOTE
Refer to Partial System procedure for information pertaining to partial system evacuation and dehydration.
1. Remove all refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery system.

7–5 T-340
 2. The recommended method to evacuate and dehydrate the system is to connect evacuation hoses at the
compressor suction and liquid line service valve (see Figure 7.4). Be sure the service hoses are suited for
evacuation purposes.
3. Test the evacuation setup for leaks by backseating the unit service valves and drawing a deep vacuum with
the vacuum pump and gauge valves open. Shut off the pump and check to see if the vacuum holds. Repair
leaks if necessary.
4. Midseat the refrigerant system service valves.
5. Open the vacuum pump and electronic vacuum gauge valves, if they are not already open. Start the vacuum
pump. Evacuate unit until the electronic vacuum gauge indicates 2000 microns. Close the electronic vac-
uum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut off the vacuum pump. Wait a few minutes to be sure the vac-
uum holds.
6. Break the vacuum with either clean dry refrigerant 134a or dry nitrogen. Raise system pressure to roughly
0.14 bar (2 psig), monitoring it with the compound gauge.
7. Remove refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery system.
8. Repeat steps e. and f. one time.
9. Remove the copper tubing and change the filter drier. Evacuate unit to 500 microns. Close the electronic
vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut off the vacuum pump. Wait five minutes to see if vacuum
holds. This procedure checks for residual moisture and/or leaks.
10. With a vacuum still in the unit, the refrigerant charge may be drawn into the system from a refrigerant con-
tainer on weight scales.

7.6.4 Evacuate and Dehydrate - Partial System

1. If refrigerant charge has been removed from the low side only, evacuate the low side by connecting the
evacuation set-up at the compressor suction valve and the liquid service valve but leave the service valves
frontseated until evacuation is completed.
2. Once evacuation has been completed and the pump has been isolated, fully backseat the service valves to
isolate the service connections and then continue with checking and, if required, adding refrigerant in accor-
dance with normal procedures.

7.7 Refrigerant Charge

! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage. Never use air or gases containing oxygen (O2) for leak testing
or operating the product. Charge only with R- 134a: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI Stan-
dard 700 specification.

7.7.1 Checking the Refrigerant Charge

NOTE
Use a refrigerant recovery system whenever removing refrigerant.When working with refrigerants you must
comply with all local government environmental laws. In the U.S.A., refer to EPA Section 608.
1. Connect the gauge manifold to the compressor discharge and suction service valves. For units operating on
a water cooled condenser, change over to air cooled operation.
2. Bring the container temperature to approximately 0°C (32°F) or below. Then set the controller set point to -
25°C (-13°F).
3. Partially block the condenser coil inlet air. Increase the area blocked until the compressor discharge pres-
sure is raised to approximately 12.8 bar (185 psig).
4. On units equipped with a receiver, the level should be between the glasses. On units equipped with a water-
cooled condenser, the level should be at the center of the glass. If the refrigerant level is not correct, con-
tinue with the following paragraphs to add or remove refrigerant as required.

T-340 7–6
7.7.2 Adding Refrigerant to System (Full Charge)
1. Evacuate unit and leave in deep vacuum (see Section 7.6.1).
2. Place cylinder of R-134a on scale and connect charging line from cylinder to liquid line valve. Purge
charging line at liquid line valve and then note weight of cylinder and refrigerant.
3. Open liquid valve on cylinder. Open liquid line valve half-way and allow liquid refrigerant to flow into the unit
until the correct weight of refrigerant (see Section 3.2) has been added as indicated by scales.

NOTE
It may be necessary to finish charging unit through suction service valve in gas form, due to pressure rise in
high side of the system.
4. Backseat manual liquid line valve (to close off gauge port). Close liquid valve on cylinder.
5. Start unit in cooling mode. Run for approximately 10 minutes and check the refrigerant charge.

7.7.3 Adding Refrigerant to System (Partial Charge)

1. Examine refrigerant system for any evidence of leaks, repair as necessary (see Section 7.5).
2. Maintain the conditions outlined in Section 7.7.1.
3. Fully backseat the suction service valve and remove the service port cap.
4. Connect charging line between suction service valve port and cylinder of refrigerant R-134a. Open VAPOR
valve.
5. Partially frontseat (turn clockwise) the suction service valve and slowly add charge until the refrigerant
appears at the proper level. Be careful not to frontseat the suction valve fully, if the compressor is operated
in a vacuum, internal damage may result.

7.8 Compressor

! WARNING
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and power plug disconnected before replacing the compressor.

! WARNING
Before disassembly of the compressor, be sure to relieve the internal pressure very carefully
by slightly loosening the couplings to break the seal.

! CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low suction pressure very quickly. Do not use the compressor
to evacuate the system below 0 psig. Never operate the compressor with the suction or dis-
charge service valves closed (frontseated). Internal damage will result from operating the com-
pressor in a deep vacuum.

NOTICE
Replacement compressors are supplied without oil.

7.8.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor

1. Turn the unit ON and run it in full cool mode for 10 minutes.

NOTE
If the compressor is not operational, front-seat the suction and discharge service valves and go to step e.
below.

7–7 T-340
 2. Frontseat the manual liquid line valve and allow the unit to pull-down to 0.1 kg/cm2 (1 psig).
3. Turn the unit start-stop switch (ST) and unit circuit breaker (CB-1) OFF, and disconnect power to the unit.
4. Frontseat the discharge and suction service valves.
5. Remove all remaining refrigerant from the compressor using a refrigerant recovery system.
6. Remove the compressor terminal cover, disconnect the ground wire and pull the cable plug from the com-
pressor terminals. Install the terminal cover back after removing the power cable.

NOTE
Inspect the power cable (plug) terminals to ensure they are not deformed or have any signs of heat or arc-
ing. If any damage is noted, replace the power cable.
7. Remove the Rotalock fittings from the suction and discharge service connections, and uncouple the
unloader and economizer lines from the compressor.
8. Cut the dome temperature sensor (CPDS) wires. The replacement compressor comes with a CPDS already
assembled.
9. Remove and save the compressor base mounting bolts. Discard the 4 top resilient mounts and washers.
10. Remove (slide out) the old compressor from the unit.
11. Inspect compressor base plate for wear. Replace, if necessary.
12. Wire tie the compressor base plate to the compressor, and then slide the new compressor into the unit (see
Figure 7.5).

Figure 7.5 Compressor Kit

3
4
2

1
5

11 2
12
6

7
8
7
Power Cable Lubricant - 9
Krytox (Not Shown) 10

1) Compressor 7) SST Washers

2) Teflon Seal for Valve Connection (2) 8) Resilient Mount
3) O-Ring (Unloader Connection) 9) Mylar Washers
4) Compressor Discharge Temperature 10) Wire Ties
Sensor 11) Power Cable Gasket
5) O-Ring (Economizer Connection) 12) Ground Connection Screw
6) Base Mounting Bolts
-----

NOTE
DO NOT add any oil to the replacement compressor. Replacement compressor is shipped with full oil
charge of 60 oz.

T-340 7–8
 13. Cut and discard the wire ties used to hold the base plate to the compressor.
14. Place the new SST washers on each side of the resilient mounts, and the new Mylar washer on the bottom
of it (see Figure 7.5). Install the four base mounting bolts loosely.
15. Place the new Teflon seals at the compressor suction and discharge ports as well as the O-rings at the
unloader and economizer line connection ports. Hand tighten all four connections.
16. Torque the four base-mounting screws to 6.2 mkg (45 ft- lbs).
17. Torque the compressor ports / connections to:

Service Valve / Connection Torque Value

Suction and Discharge Rotalocks 108.5 to 135.5 Nm (80 to 100 ft-lbs.)
Unloader connection 24.5 to 27 Nm (18 to 20 ft-lbs.)
Economized connection 32.5 to 35 Nm (24 to 26 ft-lbs.)

18. Connect (butt-splice and heat shrink) the new compressor dome temperature sensor with the old sensor
wires removed in step h. Wire-tie any loose wiring as appropriate.
19. Evacuate the compressor to 1000microns if the unit was pumped down before the replaced compressor
was removed. Otherwise, evacuate the complete unit and charge it with R-134a refrigerant (see Section
7.6.1 and Section 7.7.1).
20. Open the compressor terminal cover and connect the compressor power cable following the steps below:
a. Liberally coat the orange gasket surfaces with the Krytox lubricant.
b. Install the orange gasket part onto the compressor fusite with the grooved or threaded side out. Ensure
that the gasket is seated onto the fusite base.
c. Coat the inside of the power plug (female) connector pins with the Krytox lubricant, and insert the plug
onto the compressor terminal connections. Make sure the orange gasket has bottomed out onto the
fusite and it fits securely onto the terminal pins while fully inserted into the orange plug.
d. Connect the green ground wire to the grounding tab located inside the terminal box of the compressor
using the self-tapping grounding screw. Close the compressor terminal box using the terminal cover
removed in step t.
21. Backseat all service valves, connect the power to the unit and run it for at least 20 minutes.
22. Perform a leak check of the system.

7.9 High Pressure Switch

7.9.1 Checking High Pressure Switch

! WARNING
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a pressure regulator.

NOTE
The high pressure switch is non-adjustable.
1. Remove the switch (see Section 7.9.2).
2. Connect ohmmeter or continuity light across switch terminals. Ohmmeter will indicate no resistance or con-
tinuity light will be illuminated if the switch closed after relieving compressor pressure.
3. Connect hose to a cylinder of dry nitrogen (see Figure 7.6).

7–9 T-340
 Figure 7.6 High Pressure Switch Testing

1 4

2 5

3
6

1) Cylinder Valve and Gauge 4) Pressure Gauge (0 to 36 kg/cm2 = 0 to 400

2) Pressure Regulator psig)
3) Nitrogen Cylinder 5) Bleed-Off Valve
6) 1/4 inch Connection
-----
4. Set nitrogen pressure regulator at 26.4 kg/cm2 (375 psig) with bleed-off valve closed.
5. Close valve on cylinder and open bleed-off valve.
6. Open cylinder valve. Slowly close bleed-off valve to increase pressure on switch. The switch should open at
a static pressure up to 25 kg/cm2 (350 psig). If a light is used, the light will go out. If an ohmmeter is used,
the meter will indicate open circuit.
7. Slowly open bleed-off valve to decrease the pressure. The switch should close at 18 kg/cm2 (250 psig).

7.9.2 Replacing High Pressure Switch

1. Remove the refrigerant charge.
2. Disconnect wiring from defective switch. The high pressure switch is located on the discharge connection or
line and is removed by turning counterclockwise.
3. Install a new high pressure switch after verifying switch settings.
4. Evacuate, dehydrate and recharge the system.
5. Start the unit, verify refrigeration charge and oil level.

7.10 Condenser Coil

The condenser coil consists of a series of parallel copper tubes expanded into copper fins. The condenser coil must be
cleaned with fresh water or steam so the air flow is not restricted. To replace the coil, do the following:

! WARNING
Do not open the condenser fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting the power plug.
1. Using a refrigerant reclaim system, remove the refrigerant charge.
2. Remove the condenser coil guard.
3. Unsolder the lines and remove the line to the receiver or water-cooled condenser.
4. Remove the coil mounting hardware and remove the coil from the unit.
5. Install the replacement coil and solder connections.
6. Leak-check the coil connections (see Section 7.5).
7. Evacuate the unit then charge the unit with refrigerant.

T-340 7–10
7.11 Condenser Fan and Motor Assembly

! WARNING
Do not open the condenser fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting the power plug.
The condenser fan rotates counter-clockwise (viewed from front of unit), pulls air through the condenser coil, and
discharges horizontally through the front of the unit.
To replace the condenser fan motor assembly:
1. Open condenser fan screen guard.
2. Loosen two square head set screws on fan. (Thread sealer has been applied to set screws at installation.)
3. Disconnect wiring connector.

! CAUTION
Take necessary steps (place plywood over coil or use sling on motor) to prevent motor from
falling into condenser coil.
4. Remove motor mounting hardware and replace the motor. It is recommended that new locknuts be used
when replacing motor.
5. Connect the wiring connector.
6. Install fan loosely on motor shaft (hub side in). DO NOT USE FORCE. If necessary, tap the hub only, not the
hub nuts or bolts. Install venturi. Apply “Loctite H” to fan set screws. Adjust fan within venturi so that the
outer edge of the fan is within 2.0 +/- 0.07 mm (0.08” +/- 0.03”) from the outside of the orifice opening. Spin
fan by hand to check clearance.
7. Close and secure condenser fan screen guard.

7.12 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning

The water-cooled condenser is of the shell and coil type with water circulating through the cupro-nickel coil. The
refrigerant vapor is admitted to the shell side and is condensed on the outer surface of the coil.
Rust, scale and slime on the water-cooling surfaces inside of the coil interfere with the transfer of heat, reduce sys-
tem capacity, cause higher head pressures and increase the load on the system.
By checking the leaving water temperature and the actual condensing temperature, it can be determined if the con-
denser coil is becoming dirty. A larger than normal difference between leaving condensing water temperature and
actual condensing temperature, coupled with a small difference in temperature of entering and leaving condensing
water, is an indication of a dirty condensing coil.
To find the approximate condensing temperature, with the unit running in the cooling mode, install a gauge 0 to
36.2 kg/cm2 (0 to 500 psig) on the compressor discharge service valve.
Example: Discharge pressure is 10.3 kg/cm2 (146.4 psig). See Table 7–5 (R-134a pressure/ temperature chart),
the 10.3 kg/cm2 (146.4 psig) value converts to 43°C (110°F).
If the water-cooled condenser is dirty, it may be cleaned and de-scaled by the following procedure:
1. Turn unit off and disconnect main power.
2. Disconnect water pressure switch tubing by loosening the two flare nuts. Install one-quarter inch flare cap
on water-cooled condenser inlet tube (replaces tubing flare nut). De-scale tubing if necessary.
What You Will Need:
• Oakite Aluminum Cleaner® 164, available as a powder in 20 kg (44 lb) pails and 205 kg (450 lb) drums.
• Oakite Composition No. 32, available as a liquid in cases, each containing 3.785 liters (4 U.S. gallon) bottles
and also in carboys of 52.6 kg (116 lbs) net.
• Fresh clean water.
• Acid proof pump and containers or bottles with rubber hose.

7–11 T-340
 NOTE
When Oakite Compound No. 32 is used for the first time, the local Oakite Technical Service representa-
tive should be called in for suggestions in planning the procedure. The representative will advise the
reader on how to do the work with a minimum dismantling of equipment: how to estimate the time and
amount of compound required; how to prepare the solution; how to control and conclude the de-scaling
operation by rinsing and neutralizing equipment before putting it back into service. The representative’s
knowledge of metals, types of scale, water conditions and de-scaling techniques will be highly useful.
Summary of Procedure:
1. Drain water from condenser tubing circuit.
2. Clean water tubes with Oakite Aluminum Cleaner) 164 to remove mud and slime.
3. Flush.
4. De-scale water tubes with Oakite No. 32 to remove scale.
5. Flush.
6. Neutralize.
7. Flush.
8. Put unit back in service under normal load and check head (discharge) pressure.
Detailed Procedure:
1. Drain and flush the water circuit of the condenser coil. If scale on the tube inner surfaces is accompanied by
slime, a thorough cleaning is necessary before de-scaling process can be accomplished.
2. To remove slime or mud, use Aluminum Cleaner® 164. Mixed 170 grams (6 ounces) per 3.785 liters (1 U.S.
gallon) of water. Mix cleaner in one half the volume of water, while stirring, and then add remaining water.
Warm this solution and circulate through the tubes until all slime and mud has been removed.
3. After cleaning, flush tubes thoroughly with fresh clean water.
4. Prepare a 15% by volume solution for de-scaling, by diluting Oakite Compound No. 32 with water. This is
accomplished by slowly adding 0.47 liter (1 U.S. pint) of the acid (Oakite No. 32) to 2.8 liters (3 U.S. quarts)
of water.

! WARNING
Oakite No. 32 is an acid. Be sure that the acid is slowly added to the water. DO NOT PUT
WATER INTO THE ACID - this will cause spattering and excessive heat.

! WARNING
Wear rubber gloves and wash the solution from the skin immediately if accidental contact
occurs. Do not allow the solution to splash onto concrete.
5. Fill the tubes with this solution by filling from the bottom (see Figure 7.7).

T-340 7–12
 Figure 7.7 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning, Forced Circulation

7
5
4 6
8
3

9
2

10
1
11
12

1) Pump support 7) Vent

2) Tank 8) Close vent pipe valve when pump is
3) Suction running
4) Pump 9) Condenser
5) Priming Connection (Centrifugal pump 10) Remove water regulating valve
50 gpm at 35’ head) 11) Return
6) Globe valves 12) Fine mesh screen
-----

NOTE
It is important to provide a vent at the top for escaping gas.
6. Allow the Oakite No. 32 solution to soak in the tube coils for several hours, periodically pump-circulating it with
an acid-proof pump.
An alternate method may be used whereby a pail (see Figure 7.8) filled with the solution and attached to the
coils by a hose can serve the same purpose by filling and draining. The solution must contact the scale at
every point for thorough de-scaling. Air pockets in the solution should be avoided by regularly opening the
vent to release gas. Keep flames away from the vent gases.
7. The time required for de-scaling will vary, depending upon the extent of the deposits. One way to determine
when de-scaling has been completed is to titrate the solution periodically, using titrating equipment provided free
by the Oakite Technical Service representative. As scale is being dissolved, titrate readings will indicate that the
Oakite No. 32 solution is losing strength. When the reading remains constant for a reasonable time, this is an
indication that scale has been dissolved.

7–13 T-340
 Figure 7.8 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning - Gravity Circulation

5
2

3’ to 4’
3

1) Fill condenser with cleaning 2) Approximately 5’

solution. Do not add solution more 3) Condenser
rapidly than vent can exhaust 4) Vent pipe
gases caused by chemical action.
5) 1” pipe
-----
8. When de-scaling is complete, drain the solution and flush thoroughly with water.

NOTE
If condenser cooling water is not being used as drinking water or is not re-circulated in a closed or tower
system, neutralizing is not necessary.
9. Following the water flush, circulate a 56.7 gram (2 ounce) per 3.785 liter (1 U.S. gallon) solution of Oakite
Aluminum Cleaner® 164 thru the tubes to neutralize. Drain this solution.
10. Flush the tubes thoroughly with fresh water.
11. Put the unit back in service and operate under normal load. Check the head pressure. If normal, a thorough
de-scaling has been achieved.
What You Can Do For Further Help:
Contact the Engineering and Service Department of the OAKITE PRODUCTS CO., 675 Central Avenue, New
Providence, NJ 07974 U.S.A. (or visit www.oakite.com) for the name and address of the service representative in
your area.

7.13 Filter Drier

On units equipped with a water-cooled condenser, if the sight glass appears to be flashing or bubbles are con-
stantly moving through the sight glass, the unit may have a low refrigerant charge or the filter drier could be par-
tially plugged.

7.13.1 Checking the Filter Drier

1. Test for a restricted or plugged filter drier by feeling the liquid line inlet and outlet connections of the drier
cartridge. If the outlet side feels cooler than the inlet side, then the filter drier should be changed.
2. Check the moisture-liquid indicator. If the indicator shows a high level of moisture, the filter drier should be
replaced.

T-340 7–14
7.13.2 Replacing the Filter Drier
1. Pump down the unit (see Section 7.4). Evacuate if unit is not equipped with service valves. Then replace fil-
ter drier.
2. Evacuate the low side (see Section 7.6).
3. After unit is in operation, inspect for moisture in system and check charge.

7.14 Evaporator Coil & Heater Assembly

The evaporator section, including the evaporator coil, should be cleaned regularly. The preferred cleaning fluid is
fresh water or steam. Another recommended cleaner is Oakite 202 or similar, following manufacturer’s instructions.
The two drain pan hoses are routed behind the condenser fan motor and compressor. The drain pan line(s) must
be open to ensure adequate drainage.

7.14.1 Evaporator Coil Replacement

1. Pump the unit down (see Section 7.4). Evacuate if unit is not equipped with service valves (see Section
7.6.1).
2. With power OFF and power plug removed, remove the screws securing the panel covering the evaporator
section (upper panel).
3. Disconnect the defrost heater wiring.
4. Remove the mounting hardware from the coil.
5. Unsolder the two coil connections, one at the distributor and the other at the coil header.
6. Disconnect the defrost temperature sensor (see Figure 3.2) from the coil.
7. Remove middle coil support.
8. After defective coil is removed from unit, remove defrost heaters and install on replacement coil.
9. Install coil assembly by reversing above steps.
10. Leak check connections. Evacuate and add refrigerant charge.

7.14.2 Evaporator Heater Replacement

The heaters are wired directly back to the contactor and if a heater failure occurs during a trip, the heater set contain-
ing that heater may be disconnected at the contactor.
The next Pre-trip (P1) will detect that a heater set has been disconnected and indicate that the failed heater should be
replaced. To remove a heater, do the following:
1. Before servicing unit, make sure the circuit breakers (CB-1 and CB-2) and start-stop switch (ST) are in the
OFF position, and the power plug is disconnected.
2. Remove the upper back panel.
3. Determine which heater(s) need replacing by checking resistance of each heater set. See Section 3.3 for
heater resistance values. Once the set containing the failed heater is determined, cut the splice connection
and retest to determine the actual failed heater(s).
4. Remove hold-down clamp securing heater(s) to coil.
5. Lift the bent end of the heater (with the opposite end down and away from coil). Move heater to the side
enough to clear the heater end support and remove
To replace a heater, do steps a through e in reverse.
Optional 5+1 Heater Arrangement Heater Removal and Replacement
Complete steps a through e noted above, then remove straight and Omega heaters:
a. To remove straight heater:
1. Locate holding clips positioned at the ends of the heater element.
2. Rotate clips toward the center of the container unit.
3. Lift the heater slightly up and out to remove.

7–15 T-340
b. To remove Omega heater (see Figure 7.9):
1. Remove the two tube clamps located near the top of the heater element.
2. Locate the holding clips positioned at the bottom of the heater element and rotate slightly toward the center
of the container unit.
3. Carefully pull heater out to remove.

Figure 7.9 5+1 Heater Arrangement - Omega Heater

2
1

1) Omega Heater 3) Holding Clips (2)

2) Tube Clamps (2)
-----

7.15 Evaporator Fan and Motor Assembly

The evaporator fans circulate air throughout the container by pulling air in the top of the unit. The air is forced
through the evaporator coil where it is either heated or cooled and then discharged out the bottom of the refrigera-
tion unit into the container. The fan motor bearings are factory lubricated and do not require additional grease.

7.15.1 Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly

! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply
before working on moving parts.
1. Remove access panel (see Figure 3.2) by removing mounting bolts and TIR locking device. Reach inside of
unit and remove the Ty-Rap securing the wire harness loop. Disconnect the connector by twisting to unlock
and pulling to separate.
2. Loosen four 1/4-20 clamp bolts that are located on the underside of the fan deck at the sides of the fan
assembly. Slide the loosened clamps back from the fan assembly.
3. Slide the fan assembly out from the unit and place on a sturdy work surface.

7.15.2 Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly

1. Attach a spanner wrench to the two 1/4-20 holes located in the fan hub. Loosen the 5/8-18 shaft nut by hold-
ing the spanner wrench stationary and turning the 5/8-18 nut counter-clockwise (see Figure 7.10).
2. Remove the spanner wrench. Use a universal wheel puller and remove the fan from the shaft. Remove the
washers and key.
3. Remove the four 1/4-20 x 3/4 long bolts that are located under the fan that support the motor and stator
housing. Remove the motor and plastic spacer.

T-340 7–16
7.15.3 Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly
1. Assemble the motor and plastic spacer onto the stator.

NOTE
When removing the black nylon evaporator fan blade, care must be taken to assure that the blade is not
damaged. In the past, it was a common practice to insert a screwdriver between the fan blades to keep it
from turning. This practice can no longer be used, as the blade is made up of a material that will be dam-
aged. It is recommended that an impact wrench be used when removing the blade. Do not use the impact
wrench when reinstalling, as galling of the stainless steel shaft can occur.
2. Apply Loctite to the 1/4-20 x 3/4 long bolts and torque to 0.81 mkg (70 inch-pounds).
3. Place one 5/8 flat washer on the shoulder of the fan motor shaft. Insert the key in the keyway and lubricate
the fan motor shaft and threads with a graphite-oil solution (such as Never-seez).
4. Install the fan onto the motor shaft. Place one 5/8 flat washer with a 5/8-18 locknut onto the motor shaft and
torque to 40 foot-pounds.
Figure 7.10 Evaporator Fan Assembly

3
2
2
4

1) Stator 5) Screw, 1/4

2) Flat washer, 5/8 6) Flat washer, 1/4
3) Locknut, 5/8-18 7) Mylar Protector
4) Impeller Fan 8) Evaporator Motor
-----
5. Install the evaporator fan assembly in reverse order of removal. Torque the four 1/4-20 clamp bolts to 0.81
mkg (70 inch-pounds). Connect the wiring connector.
6. Replace access panel, making sure that the panel does not leak. Make sure that the TIR locking device is
lockwired.

7.16 Evaporator Section Cleaning

Containers and Container units that are exposed to certain fumigants may develop visible surface corrosion. This
corrosion will show up as a white powder found on the inside of the container and on the reefer unit evaporator sta-
tor and fan deck.
Analyses by Carrier Transicold environmental specialists have identified the white powder as consisting predominantly
of aluminum oxide. Aluminum oxide is a coarse crystalline deposit most likely the result of surface corrosion on the

7–17 T-340
aluminum parts within the container. If left untreated over time, it may build up in thickness and eventually flake as a
light-weight white powder.
The surface corrosion of aluminum is brought about by exposure to chemicals such as sulfur dioxide and possibly
other fumigants that are commonly used for fumigation and protection of some perishable cargo such as grapes,
for example. Fumigation is the process by which a chemical is released into an enclosed area to eliminate infesta-
tions of insects, termites, rodents, weeds and soil-born disease.
Typically any aluminum oxide that becomes detached from evaporator fan stators will be blown into the wet evapo-
rator coil where it will be caught and then flushed out of the unit during routine defrost cycles.
However, it is still highly recommended that after carrying cargo subject to fumigation procedures, that the inside of
the unit be thoroughly cleansed prior to reuse.
Carrier Transicold has identified a fully biodegradable and environmentally safe alkaline cleaning agent (Tri-
Pow’r® HD) for the unit. This will assist in helping to remove the corrosive fumigation chemicals and dislodging of
the corrosive elements.
This cleaner is available from the Carrier Transicold Performance Parts Group (PPG) and can be ordered through any
of the PPG locations; Part Number NU4371-88.
As a general safety precaution, before using this product, refer to and retain the Material Safety Data (MSDS) sheet.

Prior to Cleaning:
• Always wear goggles, gloves and work boots.
• Avoid contact with skin and clothing, and avoid breathing mists.
• When mixing, add water to the sprayer first, then the cleaner.
• ALWAYS provide for proper ventilation when cleaning indoor evaporator coils (rear doors must be open).
• Be aware of surroundings - food, plants, etc., and the potential for human exposure.
• Always read directions and follow recommended dilution ratios. More is not always better. Using non-diluted
cleaner is not recommended.
Cleaning Procedure:
1. Remove the upper evaporator access panel inside of the unit.
2. Spray the surface with water before applying the cleaning solution. This helps the cleaner work better.
3. Liberally apply the prepared cleaner solution (5 parts water and 1 part cleaner).
4. Allow the cleaner to soak in for 5 to 7 minutes.
5. Assess area for rinsing. Follow all local regulations regarding disposal of waste water.
6. Thoroughly rinse the cleaner and surrounding area, floor, etc.When rinsing where heavy foaming solution is
present, it is very important to take the time to thoroughly rinse the equipment and surroundings.
7. Always rinse the empty coil cleaner bottle, cap tightly and dispose of properly.

7.17 Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)

The electronic expansion valve (EEV) is an automatic device which maintains required superheat of the refrigerant
gas leaving the evaporator. The valve functions are: (a) automatic response of refrigerant flow to match the evapo-
rator load and (b) prevention of liquid refrigerant entering the compressor. Unless the valve is defective, it seldom
requires any maintenance

7.17.1 Removing an EEV

1. Pump down the compressor (see Section 7.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge valves.
2. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit.
3. Remove coil.
4. Remove the valve. The preferred method of removing the valve is to cut the connection between the brazed
section and the valve, using a small tube cutter. Remove the valve.
Alternately, use a wet rag to keep valve cool. Heat inlet and outlet connections to valve body and
remove valve.
5. Clean the valve stem with mild cleaner, if necessary.

T-340 7–18
7.17.2 Installing an EEV
1. Reverse steps 1 through 4 above to install a new valve. Install valve and screen with cone of screen pointing
into liquid line at inlet to the valve.
2. During installation, make sure the EEV coil is snapped down fully, and the coil retention tab is properly seated in
one of the valve body dimples. Also, ensure that coil boot is properly fitted over valve body (see Figure 7.11).
Figure 7.11 Electronic Expansion Valve

Coil
Boot

Coil
Electronic
Expansion
Valve

FLOW
DIRECTION

3. Replace the filter drier.

4. Evacuate to 500 microns by placing vacuum pump on liquid line and suction service valve.
5. Open liquid line service valve and check refrigerant level.
6. Check superheat (see Section 3.2).
7. Check unit operation by running a Pre-trip (see Section 4.8).

7.18 Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)

7.18.1 Removing a Solenoid Valve Coil:
1. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit. Disconnect leads.
2. Remove top screw and o-ring. Remove coil and save mounting hardware, seals and spacer for reuse (see
Figure 7.12). Refer to step d. for valve coil replacement.

Figure 7.12 Coil View of Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)

1) Slotted Screw 4) Bottom Coil (large) O-ring

2) Top Coil (small) O-ring 5) Brass Spacer
3) Solenoid Coil, Enclosing Tube
and Body
-----

7–19 T-340
7.18.2 Removing the Solenoid Valve
1. Pump down the compressor (see Section 7.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge valves.
2. Remove the valve. The preferred method of removing the solenoid valve is to cut the connection between
the brazed section and the valve, using a small tube cutter. Remove the valve.
Alternately, heat inlet and outlet connections to valve body and remove valve.
3. Clean the valve stem with mild cleaner, if necessary.

7.18.3 Installing the Solenoid Valve

1. Fit the new solenoid valve into position and braze. Use a wet rag to keep valve cool whenever brazing.

7.18.4 Installing the Solenoid Valve Coil:

1. Install the brass spacer on the valve stem.
2. Lubricate both o-rings with silicone provided in the kit.
3. Install bottom coil o-ring on the valve stem.
4. Install the solenoid coil on the valve stem.
5. Place the top coil o-ring on the coil mounting screw and secure the coil to the valve using a torque wrench.
Torque the screw to 25 in-lbs.
6. Connect coil wires using butt-splices and heat shrink tubing.

7.19 Economizer Expansion Valve (EXV)

The economizer expansion valve (EXV) is an automatic device that maintains constant superheat of the refrigerant
gas leaving at the point of bulb attachment, regardless of suction pressure.
Unless the valve is defective, it seldom requires maintenance other than periodic inspection to ensure that the ther-
mal bulb is tightly secured to the suction line and wrapped with insulating compound.

NOTE
The economizer expansion valve is a hermetic valve, it does not have adjustable superheat (see Figure 7.13).

Figure 7.13 Economizer Expansion Valve

Inlet

Outlet

7.19.1 Removing the Economizer Expansion Valve

1. Pump down the compressor (see Section 7.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge valves. Evacuate if
unit is not equipped with service valves (see Section 7.6.1).
2. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit.
3. Remove cushion clamps located on the inlet and outlet lines.
4. Remove insulation (Presstite) from expansion valve bulb.
5. Unstrap the bulb, located on the economizer line.

T-340 7–20
 6. Remove the valve. The preferred method of removing the valve is to cut the connection between the brazed
section and the valve, using a small tube cutter. Remove the valve.
Alternately, use a wet rag to keep valve cool. Heat inlet and outlet connections to valve body and remove valve.
7. Clean the valve stem with mild cleaner, if necessary.

7.19.2 Installing the Economizer Expansion Valve

1. The economizer expansion valve should be wrapped in a soaked cloth for brazing.
2. Braze inlet connection to inlet line.
3. Braze outlet connection to outlet line.
4. Reinstall the cushion clamps on inlet and outlet lines.
5. Replace filter drier (see Section 7.13).
6. Evacuate to 500 microns by placing vacuum pump on liquid line and suction service valve.
7. Check economizer expansion valve superheat (see Section 3.2).

7.20 Digital Unloader Valve (DUV)

7.20.1 Removing the DUV
1. Pump down the compressor (see Section 7.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge valves. In the event
the DUV is stuck open and compressor cannot pump down, remove charge.
2. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit.
3. Loosen bolt on top of the DUV and remove coil assembly.

NOTE
There is a small spacer tube between the top of the valve and the 12 VDC coil that needs to be rein-
stalled into the solenoid valve coil. When removing the coil, it may fall out when lifted from the valve
body. Take care that the spacer is not lost; the valve will not function correctly without it.
4. Remove clamps holding the DUV to the discharge line.
5. Loosen the nuts attaching the DUV to the top of the compressor.
6. Remove the valve. The preferred method of removing the solenoid valve is to cut the connection between
the brazed section and the valve, using a small tube cutter. Remove the valve (see Figure 7.14).
Alternately, use a wet rag to keep valve cool. Heat outlet connection to valve body and remove valve.

Figure 7.14 View of Digital Unloader Valve (DUV) Assembly

2 3 4
1

6 5

1) Sleeve 4) Tube
2) O-ring (hidden) 5) Solenoid Valve Body
3) Screen Valve Strainer 6) Hex Nut, 1/2 OD
-----

7–21 T-340
 7. Examine compressor and service valves. Ensure that the O-ring is not stuck in the gland of the valve.
8. Discard the O-ring on the O-ring face seal connection.

7.20.2 Installing the DUV:

1. Lubricate the gland shoulder area and O-ring with refrigerant oil.
2. Fit new valve in position and hand-tighten the O-ring nut.
3. Use a wet rag to keep valve cool while brazing. Braze DUV to service valve connection.
4. Reinstall and tighten the brackets that secure the valve body to the discharge line.
5. Torque O-ring face seal connections to 18 to 20 ft-lbs.
6. Install the coil onto the valve body and tighten the attachment bolt.

NOTE
Confirm that the small spacer tube is inserted into the coil prior to attaching it to the valve body. The valve
will not function correctly without it.
7. Leak check and evacuate low side of unit as applicable (see Section 7.6.1).
8. Open service valves.

7.21 Valve Override Controls

Controller function code Cd41 is a configurable code that allows timed operation of the automatic valves for trou-
bleshooting. Test sequences are provided in Table 7–1. Capacity mode (CAP) allows alignment of the economizer
solenoid valve in the standard and economized operating configurations. DUV Capacity Modulation,% Setting
(PCnt) and Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) allows opening of the digital unloader valve and electronic expansion
valve, respectively, to various percentages. If the unit is equipped with an LIV, the Liquid Valve Setting allows the
LIV to be automatically controlled, or manually opened and closed.
The Override Timer (tIM) selection is also provided to enter a time period of up to five minutes, during which the
override(s) are active. If the timer is active, valve override selections will take place immediately. If the timer is not
active, changes will not take place for a few seconds after the timer is started.When the timer times out, the override
function is automatically terminated and the valves return to normal machinery control. To operate the override:
1. Press the CODE SELECT key then press an Arrow key until Cd41 is displayed in the left window. The right
window will display a controller communications code.
2. Press the ENTER key. The left display will show a test name alternating with the test setting or time remain-
ing. Use an Arrow key to scroll to the desired test. Press the ENTER key, SELCt will appear in the left dis-
play.
3. Use an Arrow key to scroll to the desired setting, and then press the ENTER key. Selections available for
each of the tests are provided in Table 7–1.
4. If the timer is not operating, follow the above procedure to display the timer. Use an Arrow key to scroll to the
desired time interval and press ENTER to start the timer.
5. The above described sequence may be repeated during the timer cycle to change to another override.

T-340 7–22
 Table 7–1 Valve Override Control Displays
Left Display Controller Communications Codes Setting Codes (Right Display)
(Right Display)
Cd 41/SELCt tIM 0 00 (0 minutes/0 Seconds)
(Override Timer) In 30 second increments to
5 00 (5 minutes/ 0 seconds)
PCnt AUtO
(% Setting - DUV Capacity Modulation) (Normal Machinery Control)
0
3
6
10
25
50
100
EEV AUtO
(% Setting - Electronic Expansion Valve) (Normal Machinery Control)
CLOSE (Closed)
0
3
6
10
25
50
100
CAP AUtO (Normal Control)
(Capacity Mode)
Std
UnLd
(Economizer = Closed)
ECOn (Economizer = Open)

7.22 Autotransformer
If the unit does not start, check the following:
1. Verify the 460 VAC (yellow) power cable is plugged into the receptacle (see Figure 7.15) and locked in place.
2. Verify that circuit breakers CB-1 and CB-2 are in the “ON” position. If the circuit breakers do not hold in, check
voltage supply.
3. There is no internal protector for this transformer design. So, no checking of the internal protector is required.
4. Using a voltmeter, and with the primary supply circuit ON, check the primary (input) voltage (460 VAC). Next,
check the secondary (output) voltage (230 VAC). The transformer is defective if output voltage is not available.
Figure 7.15 Autotransformer

1) Dual Voltage Modular Autotransformer 3) 460 VAC Power Receptacle

2) Circuit Breaker (CB-2) 230-Volt
-----

7–23 T-340
7.23 Controller
7.23.1 Handling Modules

! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from module unless you are grounded to the unit frame with a
static safe wrist strap.

! CAUTION
Unplug all module connectors before performing arc welding on any part of the container.
The guidelines and cautions provided herein should be followed when handling the modules. These precautions
and procedures should be implemented when replacing a module, when doing any arc welding on the unit, or when
service to the refrigeration unit requires handling and removal of a module.
1. Obtain a grounding wrist strap (Carrier Transicold P/N 07-00304-00) and a static dissipation mat (Carrier
Transicold P/N 07-00277-00). The wrist strap, when properly grounded, will dissipate any potential static
buildup on the body. The dissipation mat will provide a static-free work surface on which to place and/or ser-
vice the modules.
2. Disconnect and secure power to the unit.
3. Place strap on wrist and attach the ground end to any exposed unpainted metal area on the refrigeration
unit frame (bolts, screws, etc.).
4. Carefully remove the module. Do not touch any of the electrical connections if possible. Place the module
on the static mat.
5. The strap should be worn during any service work on a module, even when it is placed on the mat.

7.23.2 Controller Troubleshooting

A group of test points (TP, see Figure 7.16) are provided on the controller for troubleshooting electrical circuits (see
schematic diagram sections). A description of the test points is provided in Table 7–2.
Table 7–2 Test Point Descriptions
Test Point Description
TP1 Not used in this application.
TP2 Check if the high pressure switch (HPS) is open or closed.
TP3 Check if the water pressure switch (WP) contact is open or closed.
TP4 Check if the internal protector for the condenser fan motor (IP-CM) is open or closed.
TP5 Check if the internal protectors for the evaporator fan motors (IP-EM1 or IP-EM2) are
open or closed.
TP6 (if equipped) - Check if the controller liquid injection valve relay (TQ) is open or closed.
TP7 Check if the controller economizer solenoid valve relay (TS) is open or closed.
TP8 Not used in this application.
TP9 Chassis (unit frame) ground connection.
TP10 Check if the heat termination thermostat (HTT) contact is open or closed.

NOTE
Use a digital voltmeter to measure AC voltage between TP’s and ground (TP9), except for TP8.

T-340 7–24
 Figure 7.16 Controller Section of the Control Box

2
3

1) Controller Software Programming Port 3) Controller

2) Mounting Screw 4) Test Points
-----

7.23.3 Controller Programming Procedure

! CAUTION
The unit must be OFF whenever a programming card is inserted or removed from the controller
programming port.
1. Turn unit OFF, via start-stop switch (ST).
2. Insert software/programming PCMCIA card containing the following (example) files into the programming/
software port (see Figure 7.16):
menuDDMM.ml3, this file allows the user to select a file/program to upload into the controller.
cfYYMMDD.ml3, multi-configuration file.
3. Turn unit ON, via start-stop switch (ST).

Procedure for Software Versions prior to 5328 and/or Cards Without Updated Menu Option (menu0111.ml)
a. Procedure for Loading Operational Software:
1. The display module will display the message ruN COnFG. (If a defective card is being used the display will
blink the message “bAd CArd.” Turn start-stop switch OFF and remove the card.)
2. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until the display reads, LOAd 53XX for Scroll.
3. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
4. The display will alternate to between PrESS EntR and rEV XXXX.
5. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
6. The display will show the message “Pro SoFt”. This message will last for up to one minute.
7. The display module will go blank briefly, then read “Pro donE” when the software loading has completed. (If
a problem occurs while loading the software: the display will blink the message “Pro FAIL” or “bad 12V.”
Turn start-stop switch OFF and remove the card.)
8. Turn unit OFF, via start-stop switch (ST).
9. Remove the PCMCIA card from the programming/software port and return the unit to normal operation by
placing the start-stop switch in the ON position.

7–25 T-340
 10. Turn power on and wait about 15 seconds for the new software to load into the controller memory. The sta-
tus LED will flash quickly and the display will remain blank as the controller loads the new software. When
complete, the controller will reset and power up normally.
11. Wait for default display, setpoint on the left, and control temperature on the right.
12. Confirm software is correct using keypad code select 18 to view Cd18 XXXX.
13. Turn power off. Operational software is loaded.
b. Procedure for Loading Configuration Software:
1. Turn unit OFF using start-stop switch (ST).
2. Insert software/programming PCMCIA card containing the following (example) files into the programming/soft-
ware port (see Figure 7.16):
menuDDMM.ml3, this file allows the user to select the file/program to upload into the controller.
cfYYMMDD.ml3, multi-configuration file.
3. Turn unit ON using start-stop switch (ST).
4. The display module will display the message ruN COnFG. (If a defective card is being used the display will
blink the message “bAd CArd.” Turn start-stop switch OFF and remove the card.)
5. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
6. The display module will go blank briefly and then display “551 00”, based on the operational software
installed.
7. Press the Up or Down Arrow key to scroll through the list to obtain the proper model dash number. (If a
defective card is being used, the display will blink the message “bAd CArd.” Turn start-stop switch OFF and
remove the card.)
8. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
9. When software loading has successfully completed, the display will show the message “EEPrM donE.” (If a
problem occurs while loading the software, the display will blink the message “Pro FAIL” or “bad 12V.” Turn
start-stop switch OFF and remove the card.)
10. Turn unit OFF using start-stop switch (ST).
11. Remove the PCMCIA card from the programming/software port and return the unit to normal operation by
placing the start-stop switch in the ON position.
12. Confirm the correct model configuration by using the keypad to select Cd20. The model displayed should
match the unit serial number plate.

Procedure for Software Versions 5350 and Greater With Updated Menu Option (menu0115.ml)
The updated menu option allows the operational software to be loaded, and time and container identification to be set.
a. Procedure for Loading Operational Software:
1. The display module will display the message SetUP.
2. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until the display reads, LOAd 53XX for Scroll.
3. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
4. The display will alternate to between PrESS EntR and rEV XXXX.
5. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
6. The display will show the message “Pro SoFt”. This message will last for up to one minute.
7. The display module will go blank briefly, then read “Pro donE” when the software loading has loaded. (If a
problem occurs while loading the software: the display will blink the message “Pro FAIL” or “bad 12V.” Turn
start-stop switch OFF and remove the card.)
8. Turn unit OFF, via start-stop switch (ST).
9. Remove the PCMCIA card from the programming/software port and return the unit to normal operation by
placing the start-stop switch in the ON position.

T-340 7–26
 10. Turn power on and wait about 15 seconds for the new software to load into the controller memory. The sta-
tus LED will flash quickly and the display will remain blank as the controller loads the new software.
When complete, the controller will reset and power up normally.
11. Wait for default display, setpoint on the left, and control temperature on the right.
12. Confirm software is correct using keypad code select 18 to view Cd18 XXXX.
13. Turn power off. Operational software is loaded.
b. Procedure for Loading Configuration Software:
1. Turn unit OFF using start-stop switch (ST).
2. Insert software/programming PCMCIA card containing the following (example) files into the programming/soft-
ware port (see Figure 7.16):
menuDDMM.ml3, this file allows the user to select the file/program to upload into the controller.
cfYYMMDD.ml3, multi-configuration file.
3. Turn unit ON using start-stop switch (ST).
4. Press the Up or Down Arrow key key until the display reads Set UP.
5. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
6. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until the display reads XXXX the message ruN COnFG. (If a defective card
is being used the display will blink the message “bAd CArd.” Turn the start-stop switch OFF and remove the
card.)
7. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
8. The display module will go blank briefly and then display “551 00”, based on the operational software
installed.
9. Press the Up or Down Arrow key to scroll through the list to obtain the proper model dash number. (If a
defective card is being used, the display will blink the message “bAd CArd.” Turn start-stop switch OFF and
remove the card.)
10. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
11. When software loading has successfully completed, the display will show the message “EEPrM donE.” (If a
problem occurs while loading the software, the display will blink the message “Pro FAIL” or “bad 12V.” Turn
start-stop switch OFF and remove the card.)
12. Turn unit OFF using start-stop switch (ST).
13. Remove the PCMCIA card from the programming/software port and return the unit to normal operation by
placing the start-stop switch in the ON position.
14. Confirm correct model configuration using the keypad to choose code 20 (CD20). The model displayed should
match the unit serial number plate.
c. Procedure for Setting the Date and Time:
1. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until display reads Set TIM.
2. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
3. The first value to be modified is the date in YYYY-MM-DD format. The values will be entered from right to
left. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to increase or decrease the values. The ENTER key will enter the
information for the current field and move to the next value; the CODE SELECT key will allow modification
of the previous value.
4. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
5. The next value to be modified is the time in HH MM format. The values will be entered from right to left.
Press the Up or Down Arrow key to increase or decrease the values. The ENTER key will enter the informa-
tion for the current field and move to the next value; the CODE SELECT key will allow modification of the
previous value.
6. Press the ENTER key on the keypad. The date and time will not be committed until start up procedures are
completed on the next power up.

7–27 T-340
d. Procedure for Setting the Container ID:

NOTE
The characters will be preset to the container ID already on the controller. If none exist, the default will be
AAAA0000000.
1. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until display reads Set ID.
2. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
3. Values will be entered from right to left. Press the Up or Down Arrow key to increase or decrease the values.
ENTER will enter the information for the current field and move to the next value; CODE SELECT will allow
modification of the previous value.
4. When the last value is entered, press the ENTER key to enter the information to the controller; the CODE
SELECT key will allow modification of the previous value.

7.23.4 Removing and Installing a Controller

Removal:
1. Disconnect all front wire harness connectors and move wiring out of way.
2. The lower controller mounting is slotted, loosen the top mounting screw (see Figure 7.16) and lift up and out.
3. Disconnect the back connectors and remove module.
4. When removing the replacement module from its packaging, note how it is packaged.When returning the old
module for service, place it in the packaging in the same manner as the replacement. The packaging has
been designed to protect the module from both physical and electrostatic discharge damage during storage
and transit.

Installation:
1. Install the module by reversing the removal steps.
2. Torque values for mounting screws (item 2, see Figure 7.16) are 0.23 mkg (20 inch-pounds). Torque value
for the connectors is 0.12 mkg (10 inch-pounds).

7.23.5 Battery Replacement

Standard Battery Location (Standard Cells):

1. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.
2. Slide bracket out and remove old batteries (see Figure 4.4, Item 8.)
3. Install new batteries and slide bracket into control box slot.

! CAUTION
Use care when cutting wire ties to avoid nicking or cutting wires.

Standard Battery Location (Rechargeable Cells):

1. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.
2. Disconnect battery wire connector from control box.
3. Slide out and remove old battery and bracket (see Figure 4.4, Item 8.)
4. Slide new battery pack and bracket into the control box slot.
5. Reconnect battery wire connector to control box and replace wire ties that were removed.

Secure Battery Option (Rechargeable Cells Only):

1. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.
2. Open control box door and remove both the high voltage shield and clear plastic rain shield (if installed).

T-340 7–28
 3. Disconnect the battery wires from the “KA” plug positions 14, 13, 11.
4. Using Driver Bit, Carrier Transicold part number 07-00418-00, remove the 4 screws securing the display
module to the control box. Disconnect the ribbon cable and set the display module aside.

NOTE
The battery wires must face toward the right.
5. Remove the old battery from the bracket and clean bracket surface. Remove the protective backing from the
new battery and assemble to the bracket. Secure battery by inserting the wire tie from the back of the
bracket around the battery, and back through the bracket.
6. Reconnect the ribbon cable to display and re- install the display.
7. Route the battery wires from the battery along the display harness and connect the red battery wire and one
end of the red jumper to “KA14,” the other end of the red jumper wire to “KA11,” and the black wire to
“KA13.”
8. Replace wire ties that were removed.

7.24 Temperature Sensor Service

Service procedures for the return recorder, return temperature, supply recorder, supply temperature, ambient,
defrost temperature, evaporator temperature, and compressor discharge temperature sensors are provided here.

7.24.1 Sensor Checkout Procedure

This procedure is performed to verify the accuracy of a temperature sensor:
1. Remove the sensor and place in a 0°C (32°F) ice-water bath. The ice-water bath is prepared by filling an
insulated container (of sufficient size to completely immerse bulb) with ice cubes or chipped ice, then filling
voids between ice with water and agitating until mixture reaches 0°C (32°F) measured on a laboratory ther-
mometer.
2. Start unit and check sensor reading on the control panel. The reading should be 0°C (32°F). If the reading is
correct, reinstall sensor; if it is not, continue with the following.
3. Turn unit OFF and disconnect power supply.
4. See Section 7.23 and remove controller to gain access to the sensor plugs.
5. Using the plug connector marked “EC” that is connected to the back of the controller, locate the sensor
wires (RRS, RTS, SRS, STS, AMBS, DTS, or CPDS as required). Follow those wires to the connector and
using the pins of the plug, measure the resistance. Values are provided in Table 7–3 and Table 7–4.
Due to the variations and inaccuracies in ohmmeters, thermometers or other test equipment, a reading
within 2% of the chart value would indicate a good sensor. If a sensor is defective, the resistance reading will
usually be much higher or lower than the resistance values given.

7–29 T-340
 Table 7–3 Sensor Resistance - AMBS, DTS, ETS, RRS, RTS, SRS, STS
°C °F OHMS °C °F OHMS
-40 -40 336,500 6 42.8 24,173
-39 -38.2 314,773 7 44.6 23,017
-38 -36.4 294,600 8 46.4 21,922
-37 -34.6 275,836 9 48.2 20,886
-36 -32.8 258,336 10 50 19,900
-35 -31 242,850 11 51.8 18,975
-34 -29.2 228,382 12 53.6 18,093
-33 -27.4 214,164 13 55.4 17,258
-32 -25.6 200,909 14 57.2 16,466
-31 -23.8 188,545 15 59 15,715
-30 -22.0 177,000 16 60.8 15,002
-29 -20.2 166,360 17 62.6 14,325
-28 -18.4 156,426 18 64.4 13,683
-27 -16.6 147,148 19 66.2 13,073
-26 -14.8 138,478 20 68 12,494
-25 -13 130,374 21 69.8 11,944
-24 -11.2 122,794 22 71.6 11,420
-23 -9.4 115,702 23 73.4 10,923
-22 -7.6 109,063 24 75.2 10,450
-21 -5.8 102,846 25 77 10,000
-20 -4 97,022 26 78.8 9,572
-19 -2.2 91,563 27 80.6 9,164
-18 -0.4 86,445 28 82.4 8,777
-17 1.4 81,644 29 84.2 8,407
-16 3.2 77,139 30 86 8,055
-15 5 72,910 31 87.8 7,720
-14 6.8 68,938 32 89.6 7,401
-13 8.6 65,206 33 91.4 7,096
-12 10.4 61,699 34 93.2 6,806
-11 12.2 58,401 35 95 6,529
-10 14 55,330 36 96.8 6,265
-9 15.8 52,381 37 98.6 6,013
-8 17.6 49,634 38 100.4 5,772
-7 19.4 47,047 39 102.2 5,543
-6 21.2 44,610 40 104.0 5,323
-5 23 42,314 41 105.8 5,114
-4 24.8 40,149 42 107.6 4,914
-3 26.6 38,108 43 109.4 4,723
-2 28.4 36,182 44 111.2 4,540
-1 30.2 34,365 45 113 4,365
0 32 32,650 46 114.8 4,198
1 33.8 31,030 47 116.6 4,038
2 35.6 29,500 48 118.4 3,885
3 37.4 28,054 49 120.2 3,739
4 39.2 26,688 50 122 3,599
5 41 25,396

T-340 7–30
 Table 7–4 Sensor Resistance - PrimeLINE CPDS
°C °F OHMS °C °F OHMS
-40 -40 2,889,600 18 64.4 117,656
-38 -36.4 2,532,872 20 68.0 107,439
-36 -32.8 2,225,078 22 71.6 98,194
-34 -29.2 1,957,446 24 75.2 89,916
-32 -25.6 1,724,386 25 77 86,113
-30 -22.0 1,522,200 26 78.8 82,310
-28 -18.4 1,345,074 28 82.4 75,473
-26 -14.8 1,190,945 30 83.0 69,281
-24 -11.2 1,056,140 32 89.6 63,648
-22 -7.6 938,045 34 93.2 58,531
-20 -4.0 834,716 36 96.8 53,887
-18 -0.4 743,581 38 100.4 49,656
-16 3.2 663,593 40 104.0 45,812
-14 6.8 593,030 42 107.6 42,294
-12 10.4 530,714 44 111.2 39,078
-10 14.0 475,743 46 114.8 36,145
-8 17.6 426,904 48 118.4 33,445
-6 21.2 383,706 50 122.0 30,985
-4 24.8 345,315 52 125.6 28,724
-2 28.4 311,165 54 129.2 26,651
0 32.0 280,824 56 132.8 27,750
2 35.6 253,682 58 136.4 23,005
4 39.2 229,499 60 140.0 21,396
6 42.8 207,870 62 143.6 19,909
8 46.4 188,494 64 147.2 18,550
10 50.0 171,165 66 150.8 17,294
12 53.6 155,574 68 154.4 16,133
14 57.2 141,590 70 158.0 15,067
16 60.8 129,000 72 161.6 14,078

7.24.2 Sensor Replacement

1. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power supply.

NOTE
Include white date code label when cutting out and removing defective sensors. The label could be required
for warranty returns.

2. Cut cable. Slide the cap and grommet off a bulb type sensor and save for reuse. Do not cut the grommet.
3. Cut one wire of existing cable 40 mm (1-1/2 inches) shorter than the other wire.
4. Cut replacement sensor wires (opposite colors) back 40 mm (1-1/2 inches) (see Figure 7.17.)

7–31 T-340
 Figure 7.17 Sensor Types

Mounting Stud Type

2
Bulb Type

1) 40 mm (1 1/2 in), 2 or 3 wires as 2) 6.3 mm (1/4 in).

required
-----
5. Strip back insulation on all wiring 6.3 mm (1/4 inch).
6. Slide a large piece of heat shrink tubing over the cable, and place the two small pieces of heat shrink tubing,
one over each wire, before adding crimp fittings (see Figure 7.18).

Figure 7.18 Sensor and Cable Splice

2

1
3 4

1) Cable 3) Large Heat Shrink Tubing (1)

2) Sensor (Typical) 4) Heat Shrink Tubing, 2 or 3 as required
-----
7. If required, slide the cap and grommet assembly onto the replacement sensor.
8. Slip crimp fittings over dressed wires (keeping wire colors together). Make sure wires are pushed into crimp
fittings as far as possible and crimp with crimping tool.
9. Solder spliced wires with a 60% tin and 40% lead Rosincore solder.
10. Slide heat shrink tubing over each splice so that ends of tubing cover both ends of crimp (see Figure 7.18).
11. Heat tubing to shrink over splice. Make sure all seams are sealed tightly against the wiring to prevent mois-
ture seepage.

! CAUTION
Do not allow moisture to enter wire splice area as this may affect sensor resistance.

12. Slide large heat shrink tubing over both splices and shrink.

T-340 7–32
 13. Position sensor in unit (see Figure 7.18) and re-check sensor resistance.
14. Reinstall sensor (see Section 7.24.3).

NOTE
The P5 Pre-Trip test must be run to deactivate probe alarms (see Section 5.9).

7.24.3 Sensors STS and SRS Reinstallation

To properly position a supply sensor, the sensor must be fully inserted into the probe holder mounting clamp. See
Figure 7.19. Do not allow heat shrink covering to contact the probe holder. For proper placement of the sensor, be
sure to position the enlarged positioning section of the sensor against the side of the mounting clamp. This position-
ing will give the sensor the optimum amount of exposure to the supply air stream, and will provide accurate tempera-
ture readings to the controller.

Figure 7.19 Supply Sensor Positioning

11
1
12
2

13
3

10
7
(2.5”)
9
8

1) Supply Air Stream 8) Gasket Mounting Plate

2) Insulation 9) Gasketed Support Plate
3) Back Panel 10) Gasketed Cover
4) Supply Sensor 11) TIR Bolts
5) Mounting Clamp 12) STS Probe
6) Sensor Wires 13) SRS Probe
7) Drip Loop
-----

7–33 T-340
7.24.4 Sensors RRS and RTS Reinstallation
Reinstall the return sensor (see Figure 7.21). For proper placement of the return sensor, be sure to position the
enlarged positioning section of the sensor against the side of the mounting clamp.

Figure 7.20 Return Sensor Positioning

1
2
1.50 in.
(38.1cm)

1) Mounting Clamp 2) Return Sensor

-----

7.24.5 Sensor DTS Reinstallation

The Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) sensor must have insulating material placed completely over the sensor to
ensure the coil metal temperature is sensed.

Sensors ETS1 and ETS2

The Evaporator Temperature Sensors (ETS1 and ETS2) are located in a tube holder under insulation (see Figure
7.21). When the combo sensor is removed and reinstalled, it must be placed in a tube holder by applying thermal
grease. Insulating material must completely cover the sensor to ensure the correct temperature is sensed.

Figure 7.21 Evaporator Temp Sensor Positioning

3 1.00 in.
2 (25.4cm)

1) Wire Tie 3) ETS Tube Holder

2) ETS1 and 2 4) Insulation
-----

7.24.6 Sensor CPDS Reinstallation

To replace the Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor (see Figure 7.22).
1. Ensure the unit is disconnected from the power source and that ST is in OFF position.
2. Remove the existing sensor. Clean all silicone sealer and dielectric compound from the sensor well. Ensure
well is clean and dry. The top of the compressor, where the sensor seals, must also be clean and dry.

T-340 7–34
 Figure 7.22 Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor

1) Sensor 3) Sensor Well

2) Silicon Bead
-----
3. Using the syringe supplied with the replacement sensor, squeeze all of the dielectric compound into the sen-
sor well.
4. Place a bead of the silicone sealer supplied with the replacement sensor around the sensor sealing ring.
Insert sensor into the well with the leads parallel to the suction fitting.
5. Reconnect the sensor (see Figure 7.18) and run Pre-trip P5.

7.25 Vent Position Sensor (VPS)

The vent position sensor (VPS) determines the position of the fresh air vent in near real-time via the Cd55.
The fresh air vent position sensor alarm (AL50) will occur if the sensor reading is not stable for four minutes or if the
sensor is outside of its valid range (shorted or open). This can occur if the vent is loose or the panel is defective. To
confirm a defective panel, assure that the wing nut is secure and then power cycle the unit. If the alarm immedi-
ately reappears as active, the panel should be replaced.
The alarm should immediately go inactive, check the 4-minute stability requirement. If the alarm reoccurs after the
four minutes and the panel was known to have been stable, then the sensor should be replaced.

7.25.1 Upper VPS

In order to replace the Upper VPS, the panel must be removed and replaced with another upper fresh air panel
equipped with VPS.
Upon installation, a new VPS assembly requires calibration as follows:
1. Rotate the vent to the 0 CMH / CFM position.
2. Cd45 will automatically display. Press the Enter key and hold for five seconds.
3. After the enter key has been pressed the display will read CAL (for calibration).
4. Press the ALT MODE key and hold for five seconds.
5. After the calibration has been completed, Cd45 will display 0 CMH / CFM.

7.25.2 Lower VPS

Calibration of the Lower VPS is only required when the air makeup slide, motor or sensor has been repaired or serviced.
The VPS is calibrated using the keypad:
1. Remove the two nuts that secure the air makeup panel slide to the unit.

7–35 T-340
 2. Rotate the gear clockwise until it stops.
3. Rotate the gear 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
4. Carefully reposition the slide onto the air makeup panel, given that the gear is engaged with the rail and has
not moved.
5. Position slide panel to the fully closed position.
6. Cd45 will automatically be shown on the left display.
7. Depress the ENTER key and hold for five seconds. CAL for calibration is displayed.
8. Depress the ALT MODE key on the keypad and hold for five seconds.
9. When calibration has been completed, Cd45 causes 0 CMH/CFM to be shown on the right display.
10. Secure the air makeup panel slide to the unit with the two nuts; stake threads.

7.26 Humidity Sensor (HS)

The humidity sensor (HS) is an optional component that allows setting of a humidity setpoint in the controller. In
dehumidification mode, the controller will operate to reduce internal container moisture level.

7.26.1 Checking the Operation of the Humidity Sensor

This procedure is to be performed in an effort to ease the troubleshooting of the humidity sensor. When performing
this procedure and while working on the unit, always follow the proper lockout/tagout procedures.

Items Required:

• One 7/16” socket wrench or nut driver.

• One 1/4” socket wrench or nut driver.
• One clean, clear water bottle with a minimum 6 cm (2.5 in) opening and capacity to hold 500 ml (16.9 oz).
• 100 ml (3.4 oz) of fresh water - distilled if available.
• 50 gm of Salt (NaCl).

Procedure:

1. Remove the left Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent panel.

2. Remove the humidity sensor from the mounting hardware and bring to the front of the access panel.
3. Disconnect the humidity sensor from the harness.
4. Drill a 3 cm (1.25 in) hole in the cap of a bottle.
5. Pour approximately 100 ml (3.4 oz) of water into the empty clean bottle.
6. Add salt to the water until it is present at the bottom of the bottle.
7. Cap the bottle and tape over the drilled hole.
8. Shake the bottle until the salt dissolves and water is saturated.

NOTE
To ensure saturation, add additional salt until it settles at the bottom without dissolving while shaking.
9. Remove the cap and insert the humidity sensor into the bottle through the bottle opening and pull the connector
back through the drilled hole in the cap. Then, secure the cap and seal the wire going through the cap.

T-340 7–36
 NOTE
Make sure that the sensor is not at all in contact with the salt water.

Cap opening (6 cm) Cap hole (3 cm)

Humidity Sensor

Salt water solution

10. Allow the saturated salt mixture to settle for approximately ten minutes.
11. Reconnect the humidity sensor to the harness and power the reefer unit on.
12. Press the CODE SELECT key on the keypad.
13. Use the Arrow keys until “Cd17” is displayed then press the ENTER key.

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

14. This displays the humidity sensor reading. Verify the reading is between 60% and 85% relative humidity.
15. If the humidity sensor display is outside of this range, reconfirm the salt mixture and retest. If not in range,
replace the sensor at the next opportunity.
16. Wipe clean and reinstall the humidity sensor and access panel. Torque the access panel hardware to 69 kg-
cm (60 in.-lbs.) using a crossing pattern similar to the numbering below.

17. If the panel gasket is damaged and needs to be replaced, use the following part numbers:
• 42-00296-01: Standard Panel Gasket
• 42-00823-00: XtendFRESH Panel Gasket

7–37 T-340
7.26.2

7.27 eAutoFresh Service

7.27.1 Servicing the eAutoFresh Air Filter
Removing the Air Sample Filter Element
The air sample filter element can be accessed in two ways:
1. Through the eAutoFresh side evaporator access panel (see item 11, Figure 3.2).
2. Through the inside of the container by lowering the upper evaporator panel.
a. By hand, unscrew and remove the filter cup from the bottom of the air sample filter assembly.
b. Remove the filter element from the filter assembly.
c. Install the new air sample filter element by reversing the above steps.

7.27.2 Checking eAutoFresh Drive System

Checking the Auto Slide:
1. To check with an ohmmeter, disconnect the four pin connector to the stepper motor. With a reliable digital
ohmmeter, check the winding resistance. In normal ambient, the motor should have 72 to 84 ohms mea-
sured on the red/green (a-b terminals) and on the white/black (c-d terminals) leads. If an infinite or zero
reading occurs, check connections or replace the motor. If near normal or normal reading occurs, proceed
to the following sections to check out the controller.
2. To check with a SMA-12 portable stepper drive tester. The SMA-12 portable stepper drive tester (Carrier
Transicold P/N 07-00375-00) is a battery operated stepper drive which will open and close the auto slide,
which allows a more thorough check of the motor.
Checking the Slide Motor:
1. Turn unit OFF.
2. Disconnect the four pin connector from the Stepper Drive to the Stepper Motor (see Figure 7.23).
3. Attach the SMA-12 portable stepper drive tester to the Stepper Motor.
4. Set the SMA-12 pulse per second (PPS) to one PPS and press button to open or close the valve. Each LED
should light sequentially until all four are lit. If an LED fails to light, it indicates an open on that leg caused by
a poor connection or an open coil. Repair or replace as required to achieve proper operation.

Figure 7.23 Stepper Components

Stepper Drive (SD) Stepper Motor (AF)

5. Set the SMA-12 step rate to 200 PPS. Press open or close while watching the slide mechanism for move-
ment, this is an indication that the motor is working.
6. If the slide moves using the SMA-12, but fails to move when connected in the unit (refer to “Checking the
Drive Module” in the section that follows.)
Checking the Drive Module:
1. Turn unit OFF.
2. Disconnect the four pin connector to the Stepper Motor.

T-340 7–38
 3. With a voltmeter set to read 24 volts AC, attach the positive lead to the drive module outlet pin A (wire 1A) of
the four pin connector and the negative lead to the B pin (wire 1B).
4. Turn ON unit, and watch the volt meter. After a short delay, the reading should rise to approximately 12
volts.
5. Repeat for pins C and D (wires 2A and 2B).
6. If only one set of pins reads a voltage, check connections and retest.
7. If the retest reads out the same, the drive module or controller is faulty.
8. If no voltage is present in any step, the output from the controller to the drive module may be faulty. Check
the connections and wires from the controller to the drive module.
9. To replace the drive module, disconnect all connectors, unscrew from mounting, and replace with a NEW
drive module in reverse order.

7.27.3 Checking the Controller

1. Turn the unit OFF.
2. Disconnect the six pin connector to the stepper drive from the controller.
3. With a voltmeter set to read 50 volts DC, attach the positive lead to outlet pin A of the six pin connector, and
the negative lead to pin B or TP-9 of the controller.
4. Turn ON the unit for 40 seconds, and watch the voltmeter. There should be approximately 24 to 32 VDC
shown on pin A.
5. There should be zero volts on pin B.
6. After a short delay, the reading should rise to approximately 24 to 32 VDC on pin E.
7. Pins C and D will have zero to 5 volts transistor logic (TTL) signals present, however, this can only be
checked with the connector assembled as this is an open collector type circuit.
Checking the outputs on A, B and E will verify that the controller is supplying power to the drive module. To be thor-
ough, and if it is desired, the signals on pins C and D can be checked as follows:
1. Install a jumper assembly (Carrier part number 07-00408-00) to connect the drive module and controller
connectors (see Figure 7.24).
2. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to test connector socket C and negative lead to socket B, and run
as before by resetting unit.
3. Repeat for sockets D and B.

Figure 7.24 Jumper Assembly

Controller Drive Module

Connector (EC) Connector (SD)
A
B
C A
B
D
C
E
D
E
Test
Connector Jumper

There should be approximately five volts DC on sockets “C” and “D” (S1 andS2) when measured as above. If not
the connections or controller is faulty. If any of these pins are not consistent, the connections or the controller is
suspect. Check and replace as required.

7–39 T-340
7.27.4 Servicing the eAutoFresh Drive System
To replace the Drive Motor Assembly:
1. Remove the bolts that secure the eAutoFresh Panel (3, Figure 7.25) to the front of the unit. Reach in, cut tie
wrap, (2) and disconnect the motor connector (1). Bring panel to work area.
2. Remove four screws (8) fastening the grille (7).
3. Remove six screws (9) fastening the rails (5 and 11), the slide plate (10) and the gasket plate (6). Set com-
ponents aside for reassembly.
4. Remove the four screws (12) fastening the motor cup (4) to the panel. Cut sealer on outside and inside of
motor cup assembly. Push out the motor cup assembly from the rear of the panel.
5. Mount the replacement motor cup assembly in the panel using original screws. Torque screws to 0.29 mkg
(25 +/- 1 Inch pounds).
6. Reapply sealer to the inside and the outside of the motor cup assembly.
7. Mount the upper & lower rails, slide plate and gasket plate using original hardware. Apply thread sealant
and torque screws to 0.29 mkg (25 +/- 1 Inch pounds).
8. Mount grille assembly using original hardware. Apply thread sealant and torque screws to 0.29mkg (25 +/- 1
Inch pounds).
9. Reconnect the motor connector.
10. Replace the bolts that secure the eAutoFresh Panel to the front of the unit.
11. Carry out functional test (see Section 5.4.3 step c).

T-340 7–40
 Figure 7.25 Motor Cup Replacement

1 2

5
3 6 7 8

12
1
11 10 9

1) Connector 7) Grille
2) Tie Wrap 8) Grill Screws
3) eAutoFresh Panel 9) Rail Screws
4) Cup, Motor 10) Plate, Slide
5) Rail, Top 11) Rail, Bottom
6) Plate, Gasket 12) Motor Cup Screws
-----

7.28 Electronic Partlow Temperature Recorder

The microprocessor-based temperature recorder is designed to interface with the DataCORDER to log tempera-
ture with time. The electronic recorder will automatically record the return air, supply air, or both, based on the set-
ting of temperature controller configuration code CnF37 (see Table 4–4). The recorder reads and records data
from the controller in present time, under normal operating conditions.
If the power has been OFF for more than thirty days, the recorder will NOT re-synchronize (the chart will not
advance to present time), the pen tip will move to the currently recorded temperature, and the recorder will resume
normal temperature recording.

7–41 T-340
 NOTICE
If using the Electronic Partlow Recorder CTD part number 12-00464-xx,
Where xx= an even number (example: 12-00464-08)

The recorder will STOP when the power is OFF, and the pen tip will remain at the last recorded temperature on the
chart. When power is applied, and the power off period is less than thirty days, the recorder will retrieve the logged
data from the DataCORDER for the power off period and record it onto the chart. Thereafter, the recorder will
resume normal temperature recording.
If the optional DataCORDER battery pack is being used and the charge is too low to enable recording during the
power off period of less than thirty days, the pen tip will move to below the inner chart ring for the period when NO
data was recorded by the DataCORDER.

7.28.1 Replacing the Recorder

1. Turn power to the unit OFF.
2. Open the recorder door (item 1, see Figure 7.26).
3. Locate the connector below the recorder (item 6), and squeeze the ears together to disconnect the plug.
4. Remove the four mounting screws (item 8), and remove the recorder.
5. Install the new recorder by reversing the above steps.

Figure 7.26 Electronic Partlow Temperature Recorder

1 3
2

10 5

8
7
6

1) Recorder Door 6) Connector

2) Change Chart Button 7) Calibration Button (Located underneath)
3) Recorder Box 8) Mounting Screws, #10-24 x 7/16 inches long
4) Pen Tip 9) Hold Down Tab
5) Stylus Arm 10) Chart Retaining Nut
-----

T-340 7–42
7.28.2 Recalibrating the Temp Recorder to Zero
For Electronic Partlow Recorder CTD part number 12-00464-xx,
Where xx= an odd number (example: 12-00464-03)

NOTE
Use chart CTD: part number 09-00128-00 (F), part number 09-00128-01 (C).
1. Press the “Calibration” button (see item 7, Figure 7.26) on the bottom of the recorder. The pen tip will drive
fully down scale, then move upscale to the chart ring at -29°C (-20°F), and stop.
2. If the tip of the pen (item 4) is on the -29°C (-20°F) chart ring, the recorder is in calibration, proceed to step
c. If the tip of the pen is NOT on the -29°C (-20°F) chart ring, the operator must loosen the two screws on
the bottom of the stylus arm to adjust the pen tip manually to the -29°C (-20°F) chart ring. Tighten the
screws when adjustment is complete.
3. Press the calibration button and the pen will position itself to the correct temperature reading.
For Electronic Partlow Recorder CTD part number 12-00464-xx
Where xx= an even number (example: 12-00464-08)

NOTE
Use chart CTD part number 09-00128-00 (F), part number 09-00128-01 (C).
4. Press the “Calibration” button (see item 7, Figure 7.26) on the bottom of the recorder. The pen tip will drive
fully down scale, then move upscale to the chart ring at 0C (32F), and stop.
5. If the tip of the pen (item 4) is on the 0°C (32°F) chart ring the recorder is in calibration, proceed to step c. If
the tip of the pen is NOT on the 0°C (32°F) chart ring, the operator must loosen the two screws on the bot-
tom of the stylus arm to adjust the pen tip manually to the 0°C (32°F) chart ring. Tighten the screws when
adjustment is complete.
6. Press the calibration button and the pen will position itself to the correct temperature reading.

7.29 Maintenance of Painted Surfaces

The refrigeration unit is protected by a special paint system against the corrosive atmosphere in which it normally
operates. However, should the paint system be damaged, the base metal can corrode. In order to protect the refrig-
eration unit from the highly corrosive sea atmosphere, or if the protective paint system is scratched or damaged,
clean the area to bare metal using a wire brush, emery paper or equivalent cleaning method. Immediately following
cleaning, apply paint to the area, and allow to dry. Refer to the Parts List for proper paint selection.

7.30 Communications Interface Module Installation

Figure 7.27 Communications Interface Installation

CB1 Communications
Interface Module

7–43 T-340
Units that have been factory provisioned for installation of a Communication Interface Module (CIM) have the
required wiring installed. If the unit is not factory provisioned, a provision wiring kit (Carrier Transicold part number
76-00685-00) must be installed. Installation instructions are packaged with the kit.

7.30.1 Installing the Module

! WARNING
Installation requires wiring to the main unit circuit breaker, CB1.Make sure the power to the
unit is off and power plug disconnected before beginning installation.

1. CB1 is connected to the power system, see wiring schematic. Ensure that the unit power is off AND that the
unit power plug is disconnected.
2. Open control box, (see Figure 7.27) and remove low voltage shield. Open high voltage shield.
3. If using factory provisioned wiring, remove the circuit breaker panel, with circuit breaker, from the control
box. Locate, wires CB21/CIA3, CB22/CIA5 and CB23/CIA7 that have been tied back in the wire harness.
Remove the protective heat shrink from the ends of the wires.
4. Refit the circuit breaker panel.
5. Fit the new CIM into the unit.
6. Attach three wires CB21/CIA3, CB22/CIA5 and CB23/CIA7 to the CIM at connection CIA.
7. Locate connectors CIA and CIB, remove plugs if required, and attach to the module.
8. Replace the low voltage shield.

Table 7–5 R-134a Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart

Note: Underline figures are inches of mercury vacuum
°F °C PSIG °C °F BAR
-40 -40.0 14.8 -40 -40.0 -0.49
-38 -38.9 13.9 -39 -38.2 -0.46
-36 -37.8 13.0 -38 -36.4 -0.43
-34 -36.7 12.0 -37 -34.6 -0.40
-32 -35.6 10.9 -36 -32.8 -0.37
-30 -34.4 9.8 -35 -31.0 -0.34
-28 -33.3 8.7 -34 -29.2 -0.30
-26 -32.2 7.5 -33 -27.4 -0.27
-24 -31.1 6.3 -32 -25.6 -0.23
-22 -30.0 5.0 -31 -23.8 -0.20
-20 -28.9 3.7 -30 -22.0 -0.16
-18 -27.8 2.3 -29 -20.2 -0.12
-16 -26.7 0.8 -28 -18.4 -0.07
-14 -25.6 0.3 -27 -16.6 -0.03
-12 -24.4 1.1 -26 -14.8 0.02
-10 -23.3 1.9 -25 -13.0 0.06
-8 -22.2 2.8 -24 -11.2 0.11
-6 -21.1 3.6 -23 -9.4 0.16
-4 -20.0 4.6 -22 -7.6 0.22
-2 -18.9 5.5 -21 -5.8 0.27
0 -17.8 6.5 -20 -4.0 0.33
2 -16.7 7.5 -19 -2.2 0.39
 Table 7–5 R-134a Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart
Note: Underline figures are inches of mercury vacuum
°F °C PSIG °C °F BAR
4 -15.6 8.5 -18 -0.4 0.45
6 -14.4 9.6 -17 1.4 0.51
8 -13.3 10.8 -16 3.2 0.57
10 -12.2 11.9 -15 5.0 0.64
12 -11.1 13.1 -14 6.8 0.71
14 -10.0 14.4 -13 8.6 0.78
16 -8.9 15.7 -12 10.4 0.85
18 -7.8 17.0 -11 12.2 0.93
20 -6.7 18.4 -10 14.0 1.01
22 -5.6 19.9 -9 15.8 1.09
24 -4.4 21.3 -8 17.6 1.17
26 -3.3 22.9 -7 19.4 1.25
28 -2.2 24.5 -6 21.2 1.34
30 -1.1 26.1 -5 23.0 1.43
32 0.0 27.8 -4 24.8 1.53
34 1.1 29.5 -3 26.6 1.62
36 2.2 31.3 -2 28.4 1.72
38 3.3 33.1 -1 30.2 1.82
40 4.4 35.0 0 32.0 1.93
42 5.6 37.0 1 33.8 2.04
44 6.7 39.0 2 35.6 2.15
46 7.8 41.1 3 37.4 2.26
48 8.9 43.2 4 39.2 2.38
50 10.0 45.4 5 41.0 2.50
52 11.1 47.7 6 42.8 2.62
54 12.2 50.0 7 44.6 2.75
56 13.3 52.4 8 46.4 2.88
58 14.4 54.9 9 48.2 3.01
60 15.6 57.4 10 50.0 3.15
62 16.7 60.0 11 51.8 3.29
64 17.8 62.7 12 53.6 3.43
66 18.9 65.4 13 55.4 3.58
68 20.0 68.2 14 57.2 3.73
70 21.1 71.1 15 59.0 3.88
72 22.2 74.1 16 60.8 4.04
74 23.3 77.1 17 62.6 4.21
76 24.4 80.2 18 64.4 4.37
78 25.6 83.4 19 66.2 4.54
80 26.7 86.7 20 68.0 4.72
82 27.8 90.0 21 69.8 4.90
84 28.9 93.5 22 71.6 5.08
86 30.0 97.0 23 73.4 5.27

7–45 T-340
 Table 7–5 R-134a Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart
Note: Underline figures are inches of mercury vacuum
°F °C PSIG °C °F BAR
88 31.1 100.6 24 75.2 5.46
90 32.2 104.3 25 77.0 5.65
92 33.3 108.1 26 78.8 5.85
94 34.4 112.0 27 80.6 6.06
96 35.6 115.9 28 82.4 6.27
98 36.7 120.0 29 84.2 6.48
100 37.8 124.2 30 86.0 6.70
102 38.9 128.4 31 87.8 6.93
104 40.0 132.7 32 89.6 7.15
106 41.1 137.2 33 91.4 7.39
108 42.2 141.7 34 93.2 7.63
110 43.3 146.4 35 95.0 7.87
112 44.4 151.1 36 96.8 8.12
114 45.6 156.0 37 98.6 8.37
116 46.7 160.9 38 100.4 8.63
118 47.8 166.0 39 102.2 8.90
120 48.9 171.2 40 104.0 9.17
122 50.0 176.5 41 105.8 9.44
124 51.1 181.8 42 107.6 9.72
126 52.2 187.4 43 109.4 10.01
128 53.3 193.0 44 111.2 10.30
130 54.4 198.7 45 113.0 10.60
132 55.6 204.6 46 114.8 10.90
134 56.7 210.6 47 116.6 11.21
136 57.8 216.7 48 118.4 11.53
138 58.9 222.9 49 120.2 11.85
140 60.0 229.2 50 122.0 12.18
142 61.1 235.7 51 123.8 12.51
144 62.2 242.3 52 125.6 12.85
146 63.3 249.0 53 127.4 13.20
148 64.4 255.9 54 129.2 13.56
150 65.6 262.9 55 131.0 13.92
56 132.8 14.28
57 134.6 14.66
58 136.4 15.04
59 138.2 15.42
60 140.0 15.82
61 141.8 16.22
62 143.6 16.63
63 145.4 17.04
64 147.2 17.47
65 149.0 17.90

T-340 7–46
7–47 T-340
 Table 7–6 Recommended Bolt Torque Values (Dry, Non-Lubricated for 18-8 Stainless Steel)
Bolt Diameter Threads In-Lbs. Ft-Lbs. N-m
Free Spinning
#4 40 5.2 0.4 0.6
#6 32 9.6 0.8 1.1
#8 32 20 1.7 2.3
#10 24 23 1.9 2.6
1/4 20 75 6.3 8.5
5/16 18 132 11 14.9
3/8 16 240 20 27.1
7/16 14 372 31 42
1/2 13 516 43 58.3
9/16 12 684 57 77.3
5/8 11 1104 92 124.7
3/4 10 1488 124 168.1
Non Free Spinning (Locknuts etc.)
1/4 20 82.5 6.9 9.3
5/16 18 145.2 12.1 16.4
3/8 16 264 22.0 29.8
7/16 14 409.2 34.1 46.2
1/2 13 567.6 47.3 64.1
9/16 12 752.4 62.7 85
5/8 11 1214.4 101.2 137.2
3/4 10 1636.8 136.4 184.9

T-340 7–48
 SECTION 8
ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATICS

8.1 Introduction
This section contains the Electrical Schematics and Wiring Diagrams. The diagrams are presented as follows:

Figure 8.1 provides the legend for use with Figure 8.2.

Figure 8.2 provides the basic schematic diagram for standard refrigeration units.

Figure 8.3 provides the legend for use with Figure 8.4.

Figure 8.4 provides the basic schematic diagram for units with available options except Vent Positioning System,
eAutoFresh and Emergency Bypass.

Figure 8.5 provides the legend for use with Figure 8.6.

Figure 8.6 provides the basic schematic diagram for units with units with eAutoFresh and/or Emergency Bypass.

Figure 8.7 supplements Figure 8.4 and Figure 8.6 and provides schematic and wiring diagrams for Upper Vent
Position Sensor (VPS).

Figure 8.8 supplements Figure 8.4 and Figure 8.6 and provides schematic and wiring diagrams for Lower Vent
Position Sensor (VPS).

NOTE
Options other than those mentioned below may be included in wiring diagrams.

Figure 8.9 provides the wiring diagram for standard refrigeration units with 3-phase condenser fan motors.

Figure 8.10 provides the wiring diagram for units with Single Phase condenser fan motors and/or optional 5+1
heater arrangement.

Figure 8.11 provides the wiring diagram for units with eAutoFresh and/or Emergency Bypass installed.

8–1 T-340
 Figure 8.1 Legend for Standard Unit Configuration

LEGEND
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
AMBS AMBIENT SENSOR (Cï21) HR HEATER CONTACTOR (Pï4, Mï13)
C CONTROLLER (Jï19) HS HUMIDITY SENSOR (Fï21)
CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER ï 460 VOLT (Fï1) HTT HEAT TERMINATION THERMOSTAT (Gï13)
CF CONDENSER FAN CONTACTOR (Mï11, Pï6) ICF INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR FRONT (Tï21)
CH COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR (Mï7, Pï1) ICR INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR REAR (Tï22)
CI COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE (OPTION) IP INTERNAL PROTECTOR (Eï12, Hï10, Hï12)
(Aï3)
PA UNIT PHASE CONTACTOR (Lï1, Mï6)
CM CONDENSER FAN MOTOR (Hï10, Tï6)
PB UNIT PHASE CONTACTOR (Lï3, Mï3)
CP COMPRESSOR MOTOR (Tï1)
PR USDA PROBE RECEPTACLE (Eï21, Lï22, Mï22)
CPDS DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Bï21)
RM REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE (OPTION)
CS CURRENT SENSOR (Jï2) (Lï6, Mï6, Lï11, Mï11, Lï14, Mï14)
DHBL DEFROST HEATER ï BOTTOM LEFT (Rï5) RRS RETURN RECORDER SENSOR (Cï21)
DHBR DEFROST HEATER ï BOTTOM RIGHT (Tï4) RTS RETURN TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Bï21)
DHML DEFROST HEATER ï MIDDLE LEFT (Rï4) SPT SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Gï21)
DHMR DEFROST HEATER ï MIDDLE RIGHT (Tï4) SRS SUPPLY RECORDER SENSOR (Kï21)
DHTL DEFROST HEATER ï TOP LEFT (Rï4) ST START ï STOP SWITCH (Gï4, Gï5)
DHTR DEFROST HEATER ï TOP RIGHT (Tï5) STS SUPPLY TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Aï21)
DPT DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Jï21) TC CONTROLLER RELAYïCOOLING (Hï7)
DTS DEFROST TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Cï21) TCP CONTROLLER RELAY ï COMPRESSOR PHASE
SEQUENCING (Kï6, Kï7)
DUV DIGITAL UNLOADER VALVE (Eï22)
TE CONTROLLER RELAY ï HIGH SPEED EVAPORATOR
EEV ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (Pï15) FANS (Kï12)
EF EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTORïHIGH SPEED TH CONTROLLER RELAY ï HEATING (Kï13)
(Nï8, Mï12)
TN CONTROLLER RELAY ï CONDENSER FAN (Kï10)
EM EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR (Dï15, Fï12, Tï7, Tï10)
EPT EVAPORATOR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Gï21) TP TEST POINT (Fï8, Fï9, Hï7, Jï10, Jï12, Mï15)
TQ CONTROLLER RELAYïLIQUID INJECTION (OPTION)
ES EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTORïLOW SPEED (Eï9)
(Mï11, Pï7)
TR TRANSFORMER (Hï3)
ETS EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(Dï16, Dï21) TS CONTROLLER RELAY ï ECONOMIZER SOLENOID
ESV ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE (Kï9) VALVE (Eï9)
TV CONTROLLER RELAY ï LOW SPEED EVAPORATOR
F FUSE (Cï6, Dï6, Dï18, Eï18) FANS (Jï11)
FLA FULL LOAD AMPS WCR WETTING CURRENT RESISTOR (Hï10)
HPS HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH (Gï7) WP WATER PRESSURE SWITCH (Dï10)

T-340 8–2
Figure 8.2 Schematic Diagram for Standard Unit Configuration

Based on Drawing 62 −11271 Rev A

8–3 T-340
 Figure 8.3 Legend for Configuration With Available Options
(Except Vent Positioning System, eAutoFresh, Emergency Bypass Options)

LEGEND
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
AMBS AMBIENT SENSOR (Cï21) HPS HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH (Gï7)
C CONTROLLER (Jï19) HR HEATER CONTACTOR (Pï4, Pï5, Mï13)
CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER ï 460 VOLT (Hï1) HS HUMIDITY SENSOR (OPTIONAL) (Fï21)
CB2 OPTIONAL CIRCUIT BREAKER ï DVM (OPTION) HTT HEAT TERMINATION THERMOSTAT (Gï13)
(Cï1) TERMINAL BLOCK WHEN CB2 NOT PRESENT
ICF INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR FRONT (Tï21)
CF CONDENSER FAN CONTACTOR (Mï7, Mï8, Pï1)
ICR INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR REAR (Tï22)
CH COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR (Mï7, Mï8, Pï1)
IP INTERNAL PROTECTOR (Eï12, Hï10, Hï12)
CI COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE (OPTION)
(Aï3) IRL IN RANGE LIGHT (OPTION) (Lï14)
CL COOL LIGHT (OPTION) (Mï11) LIV LIQUID INJECTION SOLENOID VALVE (OPTION) (Kï9)
CM CONDENSER FAN MOTOR (Hï10, Tï7, Tï9) PA UNIT PHASE CONTACTOR (Lï7, Mï7, Nï1)
CP COMPRESSOR MOTOR (Tï1) PB UNIT PHASE CONTACTOR (Lï7, Mï7, Nï2)
CPDS DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Bï21) PR USDA PROBE RECEPTACLE (Eï22, Lï22, Mï22)
CR CHART (TEMPERATURE) RECORDER (OPTIONAL) RM REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE (OPTION)
(Aï15) (Lï6, Mï6, Lï11, Mï11, Lï14, Mï14)
CS CURRENT SENSOR (Lï2) RRS RETURN RECORDER SENSOR (Cï21)
DCH DRAIN CUP HEATER (OPTIONAL) (Tï6) RTS RETURN TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Bï21)
DHBL DEFROST HEATER ï BOTTOM LEFT (Rï5) SPT SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Jï21)
DHBR DEFROST HEATER ï BOTTOM RIGHT (Tï4, Tï5) SRS SUPPLY RECORDER SENSOR (Kï21)
DHML DEFROST HEATER ï MIDDLE LEFT (Rï4, Rï5) ST START ï STOP SWITCH (Kï4, Kï5)
DHMR DEFROST HEATER ï MIDDLE RIGHT (Tï4, Rï5) STS SUPPLY TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Aï21)
DHT DEFROST HEATER ï TOP (OPTIONAL) (Tï6) TC CONTROLLER RELAYïCOOLING (Hï8)
DHTL DEFROST HEATER ï TOP LEFT (Rï4) TCC TRANSFRESH COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTOR
(OPTION) (Dï5)
DHTR DEFROST HEATER ï TOP RIGHT (Tï5)
TCP CONTROLLER RELAY ï COMPRESSOR PHASE
DL DEFROST LIGHT (OPTION) (Lï6) SEQUENCING (Kï6, Kï7)
DPT DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Kï21) TE CONTROLLER RELAY ï HIGH SPEED EVAPORATOR
FANS (Kï12)
DTS DEFROST TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Cï21)
TFC TRANSFRESH CONTROLLER (F6)
DUV DIGITAL UNLOADER VALVE (Eï22)
TH CONTROLLER RELAY ï HEATING (Kï13)
DVM DUAL VOLTAGE MODULE (OPTIONAL) (Dï1)
DVR DUAL VOLTAGE RECEPTACLE (OPTIONAL) (Eï2) TI INïRANGE RELAY (Fï14)
TL CONTROLLER RELAY ï COOL LIGHT (Kï11)
EEV ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (Rï14)
TN CONTROLLER RELAY ï CONDENSER FAN (Kï10)
EF EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTORïHIGH SPEED
(Nï11, Mï12) TP TEST POINT (Fï8, Fï9, Fï10, Hï7, Jï10, Jï12, Mï15)
EM EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR (Dï12, Hï12, Tï10, Tï13) TQ CONTROLLER RELAYïLIQUID INJECTION (OPTION)
EPT EVAPORATOR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Fï21) (Eï9)
TR TRANSFORMER (Mï3)
ES EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTORïLOW SPEED
(Mï11, Pï10) TRANS AUTO TRANSFORMER 230/460 (OPTION) (Dï2)
ETS EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (SUCTION) TRC TRANSFRESH REAR CONNECTOR (OPTION) (Eï5)
(Dï20)
TS CONTROLLER RELAY ï ECONOMIZER SOLENOID
ESV ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE (Kï9) VALVE (Eï9)
F FUSE (Cï6, Dï6, Dï18, Eï18) TV CONTROLLER RELAY ï LOW SPEED EVAPORATOR
FANS (Jï11)
FCR FUSE, TRANSFRESH (Hï5)
WCR WETTING CURRENT RESISTOR (OPTION) (Hï10)
FLA FULL LOAD AMPS
WP WATER PRESSURE SWITCH (OPTION) (Dï10)
FT FUSE, TRANSFRESH (Hï5)

T-340 8–4
 Figure 8.4 Schematic Diagram for Configuration With Available Options
(Except Vent Positioning System, eAutoFresh, Emergency Bypass Options)

OR

OR

see Figure 7 −7
for VPS

Based on Drawings 62 −66721 and 62 −11271 Rev A

8–5 T-340
 Figure 8.5 Legend for Configuration With eAutoFresh and Emergency Bypass Options

LEGEND
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
AF EAUTOFRESH STEPPER MOTOR (OPTION) (Jï18) HPS HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH (Fï10)
AMBS AMBIENT SENSOR (Cï22) HR HEATER CONTACTOR (Pï4, Mï16)
BM BYPASS MODULE (OPTION) (Rï18) HS HUMIDITY SENSOR (OPTIONAL) (Fï22)
C CONTROLLER (Jï19) HTT HEAT TERMINATION THERMOSTAT (Fï16)
CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER ï 460 VOLT (Fï1) ICF INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR FRONT (Tï22)
CB2 OPTIONAL CIRCUIT BREAKER ï DVM (OPTION) ICR INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR REAR (Tï23)
(Cï1) TERMINAL BLOCK WHEN CB2 NOT PRESENT
IP INTERNAL PROTECTOR (Eï15, Gï13, Gï15)
CF CONDENSER FAN CONTACTOR (Mï12, Pï6)
IRL IN RANGE LIGHT (OPTION) (Lï16)
CH COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR (Mï10, Pï1)
LIV LIQUID INJECTION SOLENOID VALVE (OPTION) (Kï12)
CI COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE (OPTION)
(Aï3) MS MODE SWITCH (Hï9)
CL COOL LIGHT (OPTION) (Lï11) PA UNIT PHASE CONTACTOR (Mï1, Mï9)
CM CONDENSER FAN MOTOR (Hï13, Tï6) PB UNIT PHASE CONTACTOR (Mï10, Nï3)
CP COMPRESSOR MOTOR (Tï1) PR USDA PROBE RECEPTACLE (Kï23, Lï23, Mï23)
COS CO2 SENSOR (OPTION) (Tï12) RM REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE (OPTION)
(Lï6, Mï6, Lï11, Mï11, Lï14, Mï14)
CPDS DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Bï22)
RRS RETURN RECORDER SENSOR (Bï22)
CR CHART (TEMPERATURE) RECORDER (OPTIONAL)
(Aï18) RTS RETURN TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Bï22)
CS CURRENT SENSOR (Mï2) SD STEPPER MOTOR DRIVER (OPTION) (Kï18)
DHBL DEFROST HEATER ï BOTTOM LEFT (Rï5) SPT SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Gï22)
DHBR DEFROST HEATER ï BOTTOM RIGHT (Tï4) SRS SUPPLY RECORDER SENSOR (Kï23)
DHML DEFROST HEATER ï MIDDLE LEFT (Rï4) ST START ï STOP SWITCH (Jï4, Jï5)
DHMR DEFROST HEATER ï MIDDLE RIGHT (Tï4) STS SUPPLY TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Aï22)
DHTL DEFROST HEATER ï TOP LEFT (Rï4) TC CONTROLLER RELAYïCOOLING (Hï10)
DHTR DEFROST HEATER ï TOP RIGHT (Tï5) TCC TRANSFRESH COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTOR
(OPTION) (Dï5)
DL DEFROST LIGHT (OPTION) (Lï6)
TCP CONTROLLER RELAY ï COMPRESSOR PHASE
DPT DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Jï21) SEQUENCING (Jï9, Jï10)
DTS DEFROST TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Cï22) TE CONTROLLER RELAY ï HIGH SPEED EVAPORATOR
FANS (Jï15)
DUV DIGITAL UNLOADER VALVE (Eï22)
DVM DUAL VOLTAGE MODULE (OPTIONAL) (Dï1) TFC TRANSFRESH CONTROLLER (OPTION) (Fï5)
TH CONTROLLER RELAY ï HEATING (Jï16)
DVR DUAL VOLTAGE RECEPTACLE (OPTIONAL) (Eï7)
TI INïRANGE RELAY (Fï16)
EB EMERGENCY BYPASS SWITCH (Eï7)
TL CONTROLLER RELAY ï COOL LIGHT (Jï14)
EEV ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (Tï14)
TN CONTROLLER RELAY ï CONDENSER FAN (Jï13)
EF EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTORïHIGH SPEED
(Nï8, Mï15) TP TEST POINT (Fï10, Fï11, Hï10, Hï12, Hï15, Hï16,
Mï17)
EM EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR (Dï15, Gï15, Tï8, Tï10)
TQ CONTROLLER RELAYïLIQUID INJECTION (OPTION)
EPT EVAPORATOR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Hï23) (Eï11)
ES EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTORïLOW SPEED TR TRANSFORMER (Lï3)
(Mï14, Pï7)
TRANS AUTO TRANSFORMER 230/460 (OPTION) (Dï2)
ETS EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (SUCTION)
(Aï23, Dï18) TRC TRANSFRESH REAR CONNECTOR (OPTION) (Eï5)
ESV ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE (Jï11) TS CONTROLLER RELAY ï ECONOMIZER SOLENOID
VALVE (Eï11)
F FUSE (Dï20, Eï20, Fï20)
TV CONTROLLER RELAY ï LOW SPEED EVAPORATOR
FCR FUSE, CHART RECORDER
FANS (Jï14)
FLA FULL LOAD AMPS WCR WETTING CURRENT RESISTOR (OPTION) (Hï13)
FT FUSE, TRANSFRESH WP WATER PRESSURE SWITCH (OPTION) (Eï13)

T-340 8–6
Figure 8.6 Schematic Diagram for Configuration With eAutoFresh and Emergency Bypass Options

see Figure 7 −4 for optional

heater and 3 −ph condenser
fan motor arrangements

see Figure 7 −7
for VPS

Based on Drawing 62 −11418 Rev A

8–7 T-340
 Figure 8.7 Schematic and Wiring Diagram for Upper Vent Position Sensor (VPS) Option

(SEE NOTE)

PTC

(SEE NOTE)

PTC

NOTE: DEPENDING ON CONFIGURATION:

− VPS 2 MAY BE CONNECTED TO L1 OR T1
− PTC MAY BE INST ALLED

T-340 8–8
Figure 8.8 Schematic and Diagram for Lower Vent Position Sensor (VPS) Option

8–9 T-340
 Figure 8.9 Unit Wiring Diagram for Standard Unit Configuration With 3-Phase Condenser Fan Motors

T-340 8–10
Unit Wiring Diagram for Standard Unit Configuration With 3-Phase Condenser Fan Motors

Based on Drawing 62 −11271 Rev A

8–11 T-340
 Figure 8.10 Unit Wiring Diagram for Single Phase Condenser Fan Motor and Optional Heater

T-340 8–12
Unit Wiring Diagram for Single Phase Condenser Fan Motor and Optional Heater

Based on Drawing 62 −66721

8–13 T-340
 Figure 8.11 Unit Wiring Diagram for Configuration With eAutoFresh and Emergency Bypass Options

T-340 8–14
Unit Wiring Diagram for Configuration With eAutoFresh and Emergency Bypass Options

Based on Drawing 62 −11418 Rev A

8–15 T-340
 INDEX

Numerics Controller Troubleshooting 7-24

230 Volt Cable 2-3

D
460 Volt Cable 2-3
DataBANK™ Card 4-22
A DataCORDER 4-16, 5-8
DataCORDER Alarms 4-23
Adding Refrigerant to System (Full Charge) 7-7
DataCORDER Communications 4-21
Adding Refrigerant to System (Partial Charge) 7-7
DataCORDER Configuration Software 4-17
Air-Cooled Condenser Section 3-4
DataCORDER Operational Software 4-17
Alarm Configuration (dCF07 - dCF10) 4-20
DataCORDER Power Up 4-20
Alarm Troubleshooting Sequence 4-36
DataCORDER Software 4-17
Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly 7-17
DataLINE 4-22
Automatic Defrost 4-12
DataReader 4-21
Autotransformer 2-2, 7-23
Defrost 4-11
Defrost Initiation 4-12
B Defrost Interval 4-13
Back Panels 2-3 Defrost Related Settings 4-13
Battery 2-2 Dehumidification 2-2
Battery Replacement 7-28 Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly 7-16
Display Module 4-2
C
Cable Restraint 2-3
E
Check Controller Function Codes 5-8 eAutoFresh 2-3
Checking eAutoFresh Drive System 7-38 eAutoFresh Modes of Operation 5-5
Checking High Pressure Switch 7-9 eAutoFresh Operation 5-4
Checking the Auto Slide 7-38 eAutoFresh Operational Parameters 5-6
Checking the Controller 7-39 eAutoFresh Pre-Trip Inspection 5-5
Checking the Drive Module 7-38 eAutoFresh Service 7-38
Checking the Refrigerant Charge 7-6 eAutoFresh Start-Up Procedure 5-5
Checking the Slide Motor 7-38 Economized Operation 3-10
Communications Interface Module 2-2, 3-6, 4-22 Economizer Expansion Replacement 7-20
Complete Inspection 5-8 Electrical Data 3-7
Compressor 2-1, 7-7 Electronic Expansion Valve 3-10, 7-18
Compressor High Temp, Low Pressure Protection 4-14 Emergency Bypass 2-3
Compressor Section 3-3 Evaporator 2-1
Condenser Coil 2-1 Evaporator Coil Replacement 7-15
Condenser Fan Override 4-15 Evaporator Fan Operation 2-1, 4-14
Condenser Grille 2-3 Evaporator Heater Replacement 7-15
Configuration Identification 2-1 Evaporator Section 3-2
Configuration Software (CnF Variables) 4-4
Connection To 190/230 VAC Power 5-1 F
Connection To 380/460 VAC Power 5-1
Failure Action 4-14
Control Box 2-1
Feature Descriptions 2-1
Control Box Section 3-6
First Aid 1-1
Controller 2-3, 4-3, 7-24
Fresh Air Makeup Vent 3-2
Controller Alarm Indications 4-37
Frozen “Heat” Mode 4-10
Controller Programming Procedure 7-25
Frozen Economy Mode 4-10
Controller Software 4-3
Frozen Idle Mode 4-9

Index–1 T-340
Frozen Mode - Temperature Control 4-9 Perishable Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation 4-7
Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation 4-10 Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation 4-8
Frozen Steady State 4-9 Perishable Mode Temperature Control 4-5
Perishable Pulldown 4-5
G Perishable Steady State 4-5
Physical Inspection 5-8
General Protection 4-14
Plate Set 2-1
Generic Mode - DataCORDER 4-18
Pressure Readout 2-1
Gutters 2-2
Pre-trip Data Recording 4-21
Pre-trip Diagnosis 5-8
H
Pre-Trip Diagnostics 4-16
Handles 2-2 Probe Disagreement 5-10
Handling Modules 7-24 Programming Software Versions 5350 and Greater 7-26
Humidity Sensor (HS) Troubleshooting 7-36 Programming Software Versions prior to 5328 7-25

I Q
Installing the Solenoid Valve 7-20 Quest - CCPC 2-2
Installing the Solenoid Valve Coil 7-20
Interrogator 2-2 R
ISO Trip Header 4-24
Recalibrating the Temp Recorder to Zero 7-43
Refrigeration Circuit 3-10
K
Refrigeration Unit - Front Section 3-1
Keypad 4-2 Remote Monitoring 2-2
Removal and Replacement of Compressor 7-7
L Removing a Solenoid Valve Coil 7-19
Labels 2-3 Removing and Installing a Controller 7-28
Logging Interval (dCF03) 4-18 Removing the Solenoid Valve 7-20
Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up) 2-3 Replacing 7-10
Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent 5-3 Replacing Electronic Expansion Valve and Screen 7-18
Lower VPS 7-35 Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly 7-16
Replacing the Recorder 7-42
M
S
Maintenance Precautions 1-1
Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06) 4-20
O Sensor Checkout Procedure 7-29
Sensor Configuration (dCF02) 4-18
Operating Precautions 1-1 Sensor Re-Installation 7-33
Operational Software (Cd Function Codes) 4-4 Sensor Replacement 7-31
Option Descriptions 2-2 Servicing the eAutoFresh Air Filter 7-38
Optional 5+1 Heater Arrangement 7-15 Servicing the eAutoFresh Drive System 7-40
Specific Hazard Statements 1-1
P Standard Mode 4-18
Partlow Recorders 5-8 Standard Operation 3-10
Perishable Dehumidification 4-6 Start Temperature Recorder 5-8
Perishable Dehumidification - Bulb Mode 4-7 Start up - Compressor Bump Start 4-5
Perishable Economy 4-7 Start up - Compressor Phase Sequence 4-5
Perishable Heating 4-5 Starting the Unit 5-7
Perishable Idle, Air Circulation 4-5 Stopping the Unit 5-8
Perishable Mode - System Pressure Regulation 4-14
Perishable Mode - Trim Heat 4-9

T-340 Index–2
T
Temperature Readout 2-1
Temperature Recorder 2-2
Thermistor Format (dCF04) 4-18
Thermometer Port 2-2
To Display Alarm Codes 4-15

U
Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up) 2-3
Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent 5-2
Upper VPS 7-35
USDA 2-2
USDA Cold Treatment 4-22
USDA Cold Treatment Procedure 4-22

V
Vent Position Sensor 5-4

W
Water Cooling 2-3
Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning 7-11
Water-Cooled Condenser Section 3-5
Water-Cooled Condenser w/Condenser Fan Switch 5-7
Water-Cooled Condenser w/Water Pressure Switch 5-6
When an Alarm Occurs 4-15

Index–3 T-340
Carrier Transicold Division,
Carrier Corporation
P.O. Box 4805
Syracuse, NY 13221 USA

www.carrier.com/container-refrigeration/